ATTINY26L-8SU-SL383 [ATMEL]

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, AVR RISC CPU, 8MHz, CMOS, PDSO20, 0.300 INCH, GREEN, PLASTIC, MS-013AC, SOIC-20;
ATTINY26L-8SU-SL383
型号: ATTINY26L-8SU-SL383
厂家: ATMEL    ATMEL
描述:

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, AVR RISC CPU, 8MHz, CMOS, PDSO20, 0.300 INCH, GREEN, PLASTIC, MS-013AC, SOIC-20

时钟 微控制器 光电二极管 外围集成电路
文件: 总182页 (文件大小:2994K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Features  
High-performance, Low-power AVR® 8-bit Microcontroller  
RISC Architecture  
– 118 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution  
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers  
– Fully Static Operation  
– Up to 16 MIPS Throughput at 16 MHz  
Data and Non-volatile Program Memory  
– 2K Bytes of In-System Programmable Program Memory Flash  
Endurance: 10,000 Write/Erase Cycles  
– 128 Bytes of In-System Programmable EEPROM  
Endurance: 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles  
– 128 Bytes Internal SRAM  
8-bit  
Microcontroller  
with 2K Bytes  
Flash  
– Programming Lock for Flash Program and EEPROM Data Security  
Peripheral Features  
– 8-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler  
– 8-bit High-speed Timer with Separate Prescaler  
2 High Frequency PWM Outputs with Separate Output Compare Registers  
Non-overlapping Inverted PWM Output Pins  
– Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector  
– 10-bit ADC  
ATtiny26  
11 Single Ended Channels  
8 Differential ADC Channels  
7 Differential ADC Channel Pairs with Programmable Gain (1x, 20x)  
– On-chip Analog Comparator  
ATtiny26L  
– External Interrupt  
– Pin Change Interrupt on 11 Pins  
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator  
Special Microcontroller Features  
– Low Power Idle, Noise Reduction, and Power-down Modes  
– Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection  
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources  
– In-System Programmable via SPI Port  
– Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator  
I/O and Packages  
– 20-lead PDIP/SOIC: 16 Programmable I/O Lines  
– 32-lead QFN/MLF: 16 programmable I/O Lines  
Operating Voltages  
– 2.7V - 5.5V for ATtiny26L  
– 4.5V - 5.5V for ATtiny26  
Speed Grades  
– 0 - 8 MHz for ATtiny26L  
– 0 - 16 MHz for ATtiny26  
Power Consumption at 1 MHz, 3V and 25°C for ATtiny26L  
– Active 16 MHz, 5V and 25°C: Typ 15 mA  
– Active 1 MHz, 3V and 25°C: 0.70 mA  
– Idle Mode 1 MHz, 3V and 25°C: 0.18 mA  
– Power-down Mode: < 1 µA  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Pin  
Configuration  
PDIP/SOIC  
(MOSI/DI/SDA/OC1A) PB0  
(MISO/DO/OC1A) PB1  
(SCK/SCL/OC1B) PB2  
(OC1B) PB3  
1
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
PA0 (ADC0)  
PA1 (ADC1)  
PA2 (ADC2)  
PA3 (AREF)  
GND  
2
3
4
VCC  
5
GND  
6
AVCC  
(ADC7/XTAL1) PB4  
(ADC8/XTAL2) PB5  
(ADC9/INT0/T0) PB6  
(ADC10/RESET) PB7  
7
PA4 (ADC3)  
PA5 (ADC4)  
PA6 (ADC5/AIN0)  
PA7 (ADC6/AIN1)  
8
9
10  
MLF Top View  
NC  
24  
NC  
1
PA2 (ADC2)  
(OC1B) PB3  
2
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
PA3 (AREF)  
GND  
NC  
3
VCC  
4
GND  
5
NC  
6
NC  
NC  
AVCC  
(ADC7/XTAL1) PB4  
7
(ADC8/XTAL2) PB5  
8
PA4 (ADC3)  
Note:  
The bottom pad under the QFN/MLF package should be soldered to ground.  
2
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Description  
The ATtiny26(L) is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC  
architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny26(L) achieves  
throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power con-  
sumption versus processing speed.  
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the  
32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent  
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting  
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than con-  
ventional CISC microcontrollers. The ATtiny26(L) has a high precision ADC with up to 11 single  
ended channels and 8 differential channels. Seven differential channels have an optional gain of  
20x. Four out of the seven differential channels, which have the optional gain, can be used at the  
same time. The ATtiny26(L) also has a high frequency 8-bit PWM module with two independent  
outputs. Two of the PWM outputs have inverted non-overlapping output pins ideal for synchro-  
nous rectification. The Universal Serial Interface of the ATtiny26(L) allows efficient software  
implementation of TWI (Two-wire Serial Interface) or SM-bus interface. These features allow for  
highly integrated battery charger and lighting ballast applications, low-end thermostats, and  
firedetectors, among other applications.  
The ATtiny26(L) provides 2K bytes of Flash, 128 bytes EEPROM, 128 bytes SRAM, up to 16  
general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, two 8-bit Timer/Counters, one  
with PWM outputs, internal and external Oscillators, internal and external interrupts, program-  
mable Watchdog Timer, 11-channel, 10-bit Analog to Digital Converter with two differential  
voltage input gain stages, and four software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode  
stops the CPU while allowing the Timer/Counters and interrupt system to continue functioning.  
The ATtiny26(L) also has a dedicated ADC Noise Reduction mode for reducing the noise in ADC  
conversion. In this sleep mode, only the ADC is functioning. The Power-down mode saves the  
register contents but freezes the oscillators, disabling all other chip functions until the next inter-  
rupt or hardware reset. The Standby mode is the same as the Power-down mode, but external  
oscillators are enabled. The wakeup or interrupt on pin change features enable the ATtiny26(L)  
to be highly responsive to external events, still featuring the lowest power consumption while in  
the Power-down mode.  
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. By  
combining an enhanced RISC 8-bit CPU with Flash on a monolithic chip, the ATtiny26(L) is a  
powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible and cost effective solution to many  
embedded control applications.  
The ATtiny26(L) AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools  
including: Macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, In-circuit emulators, and evaluation  
kits.  
3
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Block Diagram  
Figure 1. The ATtiny26(L) Block Diagram  
VCC  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
INTERNAL  
CALIBRATED  
OSCILLATOR  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
GND  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
STACK  
POINTER  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
TIMING AND  
CONTROL  
MCU CONTROL  
REGISTER  
PROGRAM  
FLASH  
SRAM  
AVCC  
MCU STATUS  
REGISTER  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
REGISTERS  
TIMER/  
COUNTER0  
X
Y
Z
INSTRUCTION  
DECODER  
TIMER/  
COUNTER1  
CONTROL  
LINES  
ALU  
UNIVERSAL  
SERIAL  
INTERFACE  
STATUS  
REGISTER  
INTERRUPT  
UNIT  
PROGRAMMING  
LOGIC  
EEPROM  
OSCILLATORS  
ISP INTERFACE  
DATA REGISTER  
PORT A  
DATA DIR.  
REG.PORT A  
ADC  
DATA REGISTER  
PORT B  
DATA DIR.  
REG.PORT B  
PORT A DRIVERS  
PORT B DRIVERS  
PA0-PA7  
PB0-PB7  
4
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Pin Descriptions  
VCC  
Digital supply voltage pin.  
Digital ground pin.  
GND  
AVCC  
AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port A and the A/D Converter (ADC). It should be externally  
connected to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC  
through a low-pass filter. See page 94 for details on operating of the ADC.  
Port A (PA7..PA0)  
Port B (PB7..PB0)  
Port A is an 8-bit general purpose I/O port. PA7..PA0 are all I/O pins that can provide internal  
pull-ups (selected for each bit). Port A has alternate functions as analog inputs for the ADC and  
analog comparator and pin change interrupt as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page  
46.  
Port B is an 8-bit general purpose I/O port. PB6..0 are all I/O pins that can provide internal pull-  
ups (selected for each bit). PB7 is an I/O pin if not used as the reset. To use pin PB7 as an I/O  
pin, instead of RESET pin, program (“0”) RSTDISBL Fuse. Port B has alternate functions for the  
ADC, clocking, timer counters, USI, SPI programming, and pin change interrupt as described in  
“Alternate Port Functions” on page 46.  
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the PB7/RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than  
50 ns will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to  
generate a reset.  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
Input to the inverting oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.  
Output from the inverting oscillator amplifier.  
5
1477K–AVR–08/10  
General  
Information  
Resources  
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for  
download on http://www.atmel.com/avr.  
Code Examples  
This datasheet contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the  
device. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compi-  
lation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files and  
interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documentation  
for more details.  
6
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
AVR CPU Core  
Architectural  
Overview  
The fast-access Register File concept contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with  
a single clock cycle access time. This means that during one single clock cycle, one ALU (Arith-  
metic Logic Unit) operation is executed. Two operands are output from the Register File, the  
operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.  
Six of the 32 registers can be used as 16-bit pointers for indirect memory access. These pointers  
are called the X-, Y-, and Z-pointers, and they can address the Register File and the Flash pro-  
gram memory.  
Figure 2. The ATtiny26(L) AVR Enhanced RISC Architecture  
8-bit Data Bus  
Control  
Registers  
Program  
Counter  
Status  
and Test  
1024 x 16  
Program  
FLASH  
Interrupt  
Unit  
32 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registers  
Universal  
Serial Interface  
Instruction  
Register  
ISP Unit  
Instruction  
Decoder  
2 x 8-bit  
Timer/Counter  
ALU  
Control Lines  
Watchdog  
Timer  
128 x 8  
SRAM  
ADC  
128 byte  
EEPROM  
Analog  
Comparator  
I/O Lines  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic functions between registers or between a constant and a  
register. Single register operations are also executed in the ALU. Figure 2 shows the  
ATtiny26(L) AVR Enhanced RISC microcontroller architecture. In addition to the register opera-  
tion, the conventional memory addressing modes can be used on the Register File as well. This  
is enabled by the fact that the Register File is assigned the 32 lowermost Data Space addresses  
($00 - $1F), allowing them to be accessed as though they were ordinary memory locations.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Regis-  
ters, Timer/Counters, A/D Converters, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be  
accessed directly, or as the Data Space locations following those of the Register File, $20 - $5F.  
The AVR uses a Harvard architecture concept with separate memories and buses for program  
and data memories. The program memory is accessed with a two stage pipelining. While one  
instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This  
7
1477K–AVR–08/10  
concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-  
System programmable Flash memory.  
With the relative jump and relative call instructions, the whole address space is directly  
accessed. All AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format, meaning that every program  
memory address contains a single 16-bit instruction.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address program counter (PC) is stored on the  
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the stack  
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must  
initialize the SP in the reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The 8-bit  
Stack Pointer SP is read/write accessible in the I/O space. For programs written in C, the stack  
size must be declared in the linker file. Refer to the C user guide for more information.  
The 128 bytes data SRAM can be easily accessed through the five different addressing modes  
supported in the AVR architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Regis-  
ters, Timer/Counters, and other I/O functions. The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are  
all linear and regular memory maps.  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global  
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All the different interrupts have a separate Interrupt  
Vector in the Interrupt Vector table at the beginning of the program memory. The different inter-  
rupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position. The lower the Interrupt  
Vector address, the higher the priority.  
General Purpose  
Register File  
Figure 3 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 3. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
Addr.  
$00  
R0  
R1  
$01  
R2  
$02  
R13  
R14  
R15  
R16  
R17  
$0D  
$0E  
$0F  
$10  
$11  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
$1A  
$1B  
$1C  
$1D  
$1E  
$1F  
X-register Low Byte  
X-register High Byte  
Y-register Low Byte  
Y-register High Byte  
Z-register Low Byte  
Z-register High Byte  
8
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
All of the register operating instructions in the instruction set have direct and single cycle access  
to all registers. The only exceptions are the five constant arithmetic and logic instructions SBCI,  
SUBI, CPI, ANDI, and ORI between a constant and a register, and the LDI instruction for load  
immediate constant data. These instructions apply to the second half of the registers in the Reg-  
ister File – R16..R31. The general SBC, SUB, CP, AND, and OR, and all other operations  
between two registers or on a single register apply to the entire Register File.  
As shown in Figure 3, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them  
directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically imple-  
mented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides flexibility in access of the  
registers, as the X-, Y-, and Z-registers can be set to index any register in the file.  
X-register, Y-register,  
and Z-register  
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These reg-  
isters are address pointers for indirect addressing of the Data Space. The three indirect address  
registers X, Y, and Z are defined as:  
Figure 4. X-, Y-, and Z-register  
15  
0
0
X-register  
7
0
7
R27 ($1B)  
R26 ($1A)  
15  
0
0
Y-register  
Z-register  
7
0
7
R29 ($1D)  
R28 ($1C)  
15  
0
0
7
0
7
R31 ($1F)  
R30 ($1E)  
In the different addressing modes, these address registers have functions as fixed displace-  
ment, automatic increment and decrement (see the descriptions for the different instructions).  
ALU – Arithmetic  
Logic Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all 32 general purpose work-  
ing registers. Within a single clock cycle, ALU operations between registers in the Register File  
are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – Arithmetic, Logical,  
and Bit-functions.  
9
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Status Register –  
SREG  
The AVR Status Register – SREG – at I/O space location $3F is defined as:  
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
$3F ($5F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SREG  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set (one) for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual  
interrupt enable control is then performed in the Interrupt Mask Registers – GIMSK and TIMSK.  
If the Global Interrupt Enable Register is cleared (zero), none of the interrupts are enabled inde-  
pendent of the GIMSK and TIMSK values. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has  
occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also  
be set and cleared by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the  
instruction set reference.  
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage  
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source and desti-  
nation for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the  
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the  
BLD instruction.  
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag  
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. See the Instruction  
Set Description for detailed information.  
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V  
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement  
Overflow Flag V. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.  
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag  
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the  
Instruction Set Description for detailed information.  
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag  
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result after the different arithmetic and logic opera-  
tions. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.  
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag  
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result after the different arithmetic and logic operations. See  
the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.  
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag  
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the Instruction Set  
Description for detailed information.  
10  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Stack Pointer – SP The ATtiny26(L) Stack Pointer is implemented as an 8-bit register in the I/O space location $3D  
($5D). As the ATtiny26(L) data memory has 224 ($E0) locations, eight bits are used.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$3D ($5D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SP7  
R/W  
0
SP6  
R/W  
0
SP5  
R/W  
0
SP4  
R/W  
0
SP3  
R/W  
0
SP2  
R/W  
0
SP1  
R/W  
0
SP0  
R/W  
0
SP  
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt  
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before  
any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to  
point above $60. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack  
with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when an address is pushed onto the  
Stack with subroutine calls and interrupts. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is  
popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by two when an address  
is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.  
Program and Data The ATtiny26(L) AVR Enhanced RISC microcontroller supports powerful and efficient address-  
ing modes for access to the Flash program memory, SRAM, Register File, and I/O Data  
Addressing Modes  
memory. This section describes the different addressing modes supported by the AVR architec-  
ture. In the figures, OP means the operation code part of the instruction word. To simplify, not all  
figures show the exact location of the addressing bits.  
Register Direct, Single Figure 5. Direct Single Register Addressing  
Register Rd  
The operand is contained in register d (Rd).  
Register Direct, Two  
Registers Rd and Rr  
Figure 6. Direct Register Addressing, Two Registers  
11  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Operands are contained in register r (Rr) and d (Rd). The result is stored in register d (Rd).  
I/O Direct  
Figure 7. I/O Direct Addressing  
Operand address is contained in 6 bits of the instruction word. n is the destination or source reg-  
ister address.  
Data Direct  
Figure 8. Direct Data Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
20 19  
31  
16  
0
OP  
Rr/Rd  
16 LSBs  
15  
$00DF  
A 16-bit Data Address is contained in the 16 LSBs of a two-word instruction. Rd/Rr specify the  
destination or source register.  
Data Indirect with  
Displacement  
Figure 9. Data Indirect with Displacement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
Y OR Z - REGISTER  
15  
10  
6 5  
0
OP  
n
a
$00DF  
12  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Operand address is the result of the Y- or Z-register contents added to the address contained in  
6 bits of the instruction word.  
Data Indirect  
Figure 10. Data Indirect Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X-, Y-, OR Z-REGISTER  
$00DF  
Operand address is the contents of the X-, Y-, or the Z-register.  
Data Indirect with Pre- Figure 11. Data Indirect Addressing with Pre-decrement  
decrement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X-, Y-, OR Z-REGISTER  
-1  
$00DF  
The X-, Y-, or Z-register is decremented before the operation. Operand address is the decre-  
mented contents of the X-, Y-, or Z-register.  
Data Indirect with  
Post-increment  
Figure 12. Data Indirect Addressing with Post-increment  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X-, Y-, OR Z-REGISTER  
1
$00DF  
13  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
The X-, Y-, or Z-register is incremented after the operation. Operand address is the content of  
the X-, Y-, or Z-register prior to incrementing.  
Constant Addressing  
Using the LPM  
Instruction  
Figure 13. Code Memory Constant Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
$3FF  
Constant byte address is specified by the Z-register contents. The 15 MSBs select word address  
(0 - 1K), the LSB selects low byte if cleared (LSB = 0) or high byte if set (LSB = 1).  
Indirect Program  
Addressing, IJMP and  
ICALL  
Figure 14. Indirect Program Memory Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
$3FF  
Program execution continues at address contained by the Z-register (i.e., the PC is loaded with  
the contents of the Z-register).  
Relative Program  
Addressing, RJMP  
and RCALL  
Figure 15. Relative Program Memory Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
+1  
$3FF  
14  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Program execution continues at address PC + k + 1. The relative address k is from  
-2048 to 2047.  
15  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Memories  
The AVR CPU is driven by the System Clock Ø, directly generated from the external clock crys-  
tal for the chip. No internal clock division is used.  
Figure 16 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Har-  
vard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept  
to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per cost,  
functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.  
Figure 16. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
Figure 17 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU  
operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destina-  
tion register.  
Figure 17. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
The internal data SRAM access is performed in two System Clock cycles as described in Figure  
18.  
16  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 18. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Prev. Address  
Address  
Address  
Data  
WR  
Data  
RD  
In-System  
The ATtiny26(L) contains 2K bytes On-chip In-System Programmable Flash memory for pro-  
gram storage. Since all instructions are 16- or 32-bit words, the Flash is organized as 1K x 16.  
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATtiny26(L) Pro-  
gram Counter – PC – is 10 bits wide, thus addressing the 1024 program memory addresses, see  
“Memory Programming” on page 107 for a detailed description on Flash data downloading. See  
“Program and Data Addressing Modes” on page 11 for the different program memory address-  
ing modes.  
Programmable  
Flash Program  
Memory  
Figure 19. SRAM Organization  
Register File  
Data Address Space  
R0  
R1  
R2  
...  
$0000  
$0001  
$0002  
...  
R29  
R30  
$001D  
$001E  
$001F  
R31  
I/O Registers  
$00  
$0020  
$0021  
$0022  
$01  
$02  
$3D  
$3E  
$3F  
$005D  
$005E  
$005F  
Internal SRAM  
$0060  
$0061  
...  
$00DE  
$00DF  
SRAM Data  
Memory  
Figure 19 above shows how the ATtiny26(L) SRAM Memory is organized.  
The lower 224 Data Memory locations address the Register File, the I/O Memory and the inter-  
nal data SRAM. The first 96 locations address the Register File and I/O Memory, and the next  
128 locations address the internal data SRAM.  
17  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with Displace-  
ment, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the Register  
File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers.  
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space. The Indirect with Displacement mode fea-  
tures a 63 address locations reach from the base address given by the Y- or Z-register.  
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-incre-  
ment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented and incremented.  
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers and the 128 bytes of internal data  
SRAM in the ATtiny26(L) are all accessible through all these addressing modes.  
See “Program and Data Addressing Modes” on page 11 for a detailed description of the different  
addressing modes.  
EEPROM Data  
Memory  
The ATtiny26(L) contains 128 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate  
data space, in which single bytes can be read and written (see “Memory Programming” on page  
107). The EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles per location.  
EEPROM Read/Write  
Access  
The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space.  
The write access time is typically 8.3 ms. A self-timing function lets the user software detect  
when the next byte can be written. A special EEPROM Ready Interrupt can be set to trigger  
when the EEPROM is ready to accept new data.  
An ongoing EEPROM write operation will complete even if a reset condition occurs.  
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a two state write procedure must be followed.  
Refer to the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this.  
When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next instruction  
is executed.  
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is  
executed.  
EEPROM Address  
Register – EEAR  
Bit  
7
6
EEAR6  
R/W  
X
5
EEAR5  
R/W  
X
4
EEAR4  
R/W  
X
3
EEAR3  
R/W  
X
2
EEAR2  
R/W  
X
1
EEAR1  
R/W  
X
0
EEAR0  
R/W  
X
$1E ($3E)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
EEAR  
R
0
• Bit 7 – RES: Reserved Bits  
This bit are reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6..0 – EEAR6..0: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM Address Register – EEAR – specifies the EEPROM address in the 128 bytes  
EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 127. The ini-  
tial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be  
accessed.  
18  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
EEPROM Data  
Register – EEDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$1D ($3D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
EEDR  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7..0 – EEDR7..0: EEPROM Data  
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the  
EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the  
EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEAR.  
EEPROM Control  
Register – EECR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
EERIE  
R/W  
0
2
EEMWE  
R/W  
0
1
EEWE  
R/W  
0
0
EERE  
R/W  
0
$1C ($3C)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
EECR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..4 – RES: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable  
When the I-bit in SREG and EERIE are set (one), the EEPROM Ready Interrupt is enabled.  
When cleared (zero), the interrupt is disabled. The EEPROM Ready Interrupt generates a con-  
stant interrupt when EEWE is cleared (zero).  
• Bit 2 – EEMWE: EEPROM Master Write Enable  
The EEMWE bit determines whether setting EEWE to one causes the EEPROM to be written.  
When EEMWE is set (one), setting EEWE will write data to the EEPROM at the selected  
address. If EEMWE is zero, setting EEWE will have no effect. When EEMWE has been set (one)  
by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles. See the description of the  
EEWE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.  
• Bit 1 – EEWE: EEPROM Write Enable  
The EEPROM Write Enable Signal – EEWE – is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When  
address and data are correctly set up, the EEWE bit must be set to write the value in to the  
EEPROM. The EEMWE bit must be set when the logical one is written to EEWE, otherwise no  
EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when writing the  
EEPROM (the order of steps 2 and 3 is unessential):  
1. Wait until EEWE becomes zero.  
2. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).  
3. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).  
4. Write a logical one to the EEMWE bit in EECR.  
5. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMWE, write a logical one to EEWE.  
Caution: An interrupt between step 4 and step 5 will make the write cycle fail, since the  
EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is  
interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be modified, causing the  
interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the Global Interrupt Flag cleared  
during all the steps to avoid these problems.  
When the access time (typically 8.3 ms) has elapsed, the EEWE bit is cleared (zero) by hard-  
ware. The user software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When  
EEWE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
• Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable  
19  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal – EERE – is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the cor-  
rect address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be set. When the EERE bit is  
cleared (zero) by hardware, requested data is found in the EEDR Register. The EEPROM read  
access takes one instruction and there is no need to poll the EERE bit. When EERE has been  
set, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
The user should poll the EEWE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in  
progress when new data or address is written to the EEPROM I/O Registers, the write operation  
will be interrupted, and the result is undefined.  
Table 1. EEPROM Programming Time  
Number of Calibrated RC  
Oscillator Cycles(1)  
Typical Programming  
Time  
Symbol  
EEPROM Write (from CPU)  
8448  
8.5 ms  
Note:  
1. Uses 1 MHz clock, independent of CKSEL-Fuse settings.  
EEPROM Write During When entering Power-down sleep mode while an EEPROM write operation is active, the  
Power-down Sleep  
Mode  
EEPROM write operation will continue, and will complete before the write access time has  
passed. However, when the write operation is completed, the crystal Oscillator continues run-  
ning, and as a consequence, the device does not enter Power-down entirely. It is therefore  
recommended to verify that the EEPROM write operation is completed before entering Power-  
down.  
Preventing EEPROM  
Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is  
too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for  
board level systems using the EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied.  
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First,  
a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Sec-  
ondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing  
instructions is too low.  
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations  
(one is sufficient):  
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.  
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating volt-  
age matches the detection level. If not, an external Brown-out Reset Protection circuit  
can be applied.  
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down Sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will pre-  
vent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting  
the EEPROM Registers from unintentional writes.  
Store constants in Flash memory if the ability to change memory contents from software is not  
required. Flash memory can not be updated by the CPU, and will not be subject to corruption.  
I/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATtiny26(L) is shown in Table 2  
Table 2. ATtiny26(L) I/O Space(1)  
Address Hex  
$3F ($5F)  
Name  
SREG  
SP  
Function  
Status Register  
$3D ($5D)  
$3B ($5B)  
Stack Pointer  
GIMSK  
General Interrupt Mask Register  
20  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 2. ATtiny26(L) I/O Space(1) (Continued)  
Address Hex  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$29 ($29)  
$21 ($41)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B ($3B)  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
$06($26)  
Name  
GIFR  
Function  
General Interrupt Flag Register  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register  
MCU Control Register  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
MCU Status Register  
Timer/Counter0 Control Register  
Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)  
OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register  
TCCR1A Timer/Counter1 Control Register A  
TCCR1B Timer/Counter1 Control Register B  
TCNT1  
OCR1A  
OCR1B  
OCR1C  
Timer/Counter1 (8-bit)  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C  
PLLCSR PLL Control and Status Register  
WDTCR  
EEAR  
EEDR  
EECR  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
Watchdog Timer Control Register  
EEPROM Address Register  
EEPROM Data Register  
EEPROM Control Register  
Data Register, Port A  
Data Direction Register, Port A  
Input Pins, Port A  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
Data Register, Port B  
Data Direction Register, Port B  
Input Pins, Port B  
USIDR  
USISR  
USICR  
ACSR  
ADMUX  
ADCSR  
ADCH  
ADCL  
Universal Serial Interface Data Register  
Universal Serial Interface Status Register  
Universal Serial Interface Control Register  
Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
ADC Multiplexer Select Register  
ADC Control and Status Register  
ADC Data Register High  
$05($25)  
$04($24)  
ADC Data Register Low  
Note:  
1. Reserved and unused locations are not shown in the table.  
All ATtiny26(L) I/O and peripheral registers are placed in the I/O space. The I/O locations are  
accessed by the IN and OUT instructions transferring data between the 32 general purpose  
working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range $00 - $1F are  
21  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single  
bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction set chap-  
ter for more details. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written zero if  
accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written.  
22  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
System Clock  
and Clock  
Options  
Clock Systems  
and their  
Distribution  
Figure 20 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their distribution. All of the clocks  
need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules  
not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in “Power Manage-  
ment and Sleep Modes” on page 37. The clock systems are detailed below.  
Figure 20. Clock Distribution  
General I/O  
modules  
Flash and  
EEPROM  
ADC  
CPU Core  
RAM  
Timer/Counter1  
clkADC  
clkI/O  
clkCPU  
AVR Clock  
Control Unit  
clkFLASH  
Reset Logic  
Watchdog Timer  
Source clock  
Watchdog clock  
Clock  
Multiplexer  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
clkPCK  
clkPLL  
External RC  
Oscillator  
Crystal  
Oscillator  
Low-Frequency  
Crystal Oscillator  
Calibrated RC  
Oscillator  
PLL  
External clock  
CPU Clock – clkCPU  
I/O Clock – clkI/O  
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core.  
Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the  
data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing  
general operations and calculations.  
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, and USI. The I/O  
clock is also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are  
detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is  
halted.  
Flash Clock – clkFLASH The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually active simul-  
taneously with the CPU clock.  
ADC Clock – clkADC  
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks  
in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion  
results.  
23  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Internal PLL for Fast  
Peripheral Clock  
Generation – clkPCK  
The internal PLL in ATtiny26(L) generates a clock frequency that is 64x multiplied from nomi-  
nally 1 MHz input. The source of the 1 MHz PLL input clock is the output of the internal RC  
Oscillator which is automatically divided down to 1 MHz, if needed. See the Figure 21 on page  
24. When the PLL reference frequency is the nominal 1 MHz, the fast peripheral clock is 64  
MHz. The fast peripheral clock, or a clock prescaled from that, can be selected as the clock  
source for Timer/Counter1.  
The PLL is locked on the RC Oscillator and adjusting the RC Oscillator via OSCCAL Register  
will adjust the fast peripheral clock at the same time. However, even if the possibly divided RC  
Oscillator is taken to a higher frequency than 1 MHz, the fast peripheral clock frequency satu-  
rates at 70 MHz (worst case) and remains oscillating at the maximum frequency. It should be  
noted that the PLL in this case is not locked any more with the RC Oscillator clock.  
Therefore it is recommended not to take the OSCCAL adjustments to a higher frequency than 1  
MHz in order to keep the PLL in the correct operating range. The internal PLL is enabled only  
when the PLLE bit in the register PLLCSR is set or the PLLCK Fuse is programmed (“0”). The bit  
PLOCK from the register PLLCSR is set when PLL is locked.  
Both internal 1 MHz RC Oscillator and PLL are switched off in Power-down and Standby sleep  
modes.  
Figure 21. PCK Clocking System  
PLLE  
PLLCK &  
CKSEL  
FUSES  
OSCCAL  
Lock  
Detector  
PLOCK  
1
2
4
PCK  
DIVIDE  
TO 1 MHz  
PLL  
64x  
RC OSCILLATOR  
8 MHz  
DIVIDE  
BY 4  
CK  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
OSCILLATORS  
24  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Clock Sources  
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash Fuse bits as shown  
below on Table 3. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator, and  
routed to the appropriate modules.The use of pins PB5 (XTAL2), and PB4 (XTAL1) as I/O pins is  
limited depending on clock settings, as shown below in Table 4.  
Table 3. Device Clocking Options Select  
Device Clocking Option  
External Crystal/Ceramic Resonator  
External Low-frequency Crystal  
External RC Oscillator  
PLLCK  
CKSEL3..0  
1111 - 1010  
1001  
1
1
1
1
1
0
1000 - 0101  
0100 - 0001  
0000  
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator  
External Clock  
PLL Clock  
0001  
Table 4. PB5, and PB4 Functionality vs. Device Clocking Options(1)  
Device Clocking Option  
External Clock  
PLLCK  
CKSEL [3:0]  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
PB4  
PB5  
I/O  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
XTAL1  
I/O  
Internal RC Oscillator  
I/O  
Internal RC Oscillator  
I/O  
I/O  
Internal RC Oscillator  
I/O  
I/O  
Internal RC Oscillator  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
I/O  
I/O  
External RC Oscillator  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
XTAL1  
I/O  
I/O  
External RC Oscillator  
I/O  
External RC Oscillator  
I/O  
External RC Oscillator  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
I/O  
External Low-frequency Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
External Crystal/Resonator Oscillator  
PLL  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
XTAL2  
I/O  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
0001  
Note:  
1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.  
The various choices for each clocking option is given in the following sections. When the CPU  
wakes up from Power-down, the selected clock source is used to time the start-up, ensuring sta-  
ble oscillator operation before instruction execution starts. When the CPU starts from Reset,  
there is as an additional delay allowing the power to reach a stable level before commencing  
normal operation. The Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing this real-time part of the start-up  
time. The number of WDT Oscillator cycles used for each time-out is shown in Table 5. The fre-  
25  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
quency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent as shown in the Electrical  
Characteristics section.  
Table 5. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles  
Typ Time-out (VCC = 5.0V)  
Typ Time-out (VCC = 3.0V)  
Number of Cycles  
4K (4,096)  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
4.3 ms  
69 ms  
64K (65,536)  
Default Clock  
Source  
The deviced is shipped with CKSEL = “0001”, SUT = “10”, and PLLCK unprogrammed. The  
default clock source setting is therefore the internal RC Oscillator with longest startup time. This  
default setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using an In-  
System or Parallel Programmer.  
Crystal Oscillator  
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be con-  
figured for use as an On-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 22. Either a quartz crystal or a  
ceramic resonator may be used. The maximum frequency for resonators is 12 MHz. The  
CKOPT Fuse should always be unprogrammed when using this clock option. C1 and C2 should  
always be equal. The optimal value of the capacitors depends on the crystal or resonator in use,  
the amount of stray capacitance, and the electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial  
guidelines for choosing capacitors for use with crystals are given in Table 6. For ceramic resona-  
tors, the capacitor values given by the manufacturer should be used.  
Figure 22. Crystal Oscillator Connections  
C2  
XTAL2  
C1  
XTAL1  
GND  
The Oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency  
range. The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..1 as shown in Table 6.  
Table 6. Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes  
Frequency  
Range (MHz)  
Recommended Range for Capacitors C1 and  
C2 for Use with Crystals (pF)  
CKSEL3..1  
101(1)  
0.4 - 0.9  
0.9 - 3.0  
3.0 - 16  
16 -  
110  
12 - 22  
12 - 22  
12 - 15  
111  
Note:  
1. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators.  
26  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The CKSEL0 Fuse together with the SUT1..0 Fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table  
7.  
Table 7. Start-up Times for the Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time  
CKSEL0 SUT1..0 from Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
Recommended  
Usage  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
00  
01  
10  
11  
00  
01  
10  
11  
258 CK(1)  
258 CK(1)  
1K CK(2)  
1K CK(2)  
1K CK(2)  
16K CK  
16K CK  
16K CK  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Ceramic resonator,  
fast rising power  
Ceramic resonator,  
slowly rising power  
Ceramic resonator,  
BOD enabled  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Ceramic resonator,  
fast rising power  
Ceramic resonator,  
slowly rising power  
Crystal Oscillator,  
BOD enabled  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Crystal Oscillator, fast  
rising power  
Crystal Oscillator,  
slowly rising power  
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of the  
device, and only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application.  
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency stability  
at start-up. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the maximum fre-  
quency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application.  
Low-frequency  
Crystal Oscillator  
To use a 32.768 kHz watch crystal as the clock source for the device, the Low-frequency Crystal  
Oscillator must be selected by setting the PLLCK to “1” and CKSEL Fuses to “1001”. The crystal  
should be connected as shown in Figure 22. By programming the CKOPT Fuse, the user can  
enable internal capacitors on XTAL1 and XTAL2, thereby removing the need for external capac-  
itors. The internal capacitors have a nominal value of 36 pF.  
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in  
Table 8.  
Table 8. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time  
SUT1..0 from Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
Recommended Usage  
00  
01  
10  
11  
1K CK(1)  
1K CK(1)  
32K CK  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Fast rising power or BOD enabled  
Slowly rising power  
65 ms  
Stable frequency at start-up  
Reserved  
Note:  
1. These options should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the  
application.  
27  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
External RC  
Oscillator  
For timing insensitive applications, the external RC configuration shown in Figure 23 can be  
used. The frequency is roughly estimated by the equation f = 1/(3RC). C should be at least 22  
pF. By programming the CKOPT Fuse, the user can enable an internal 36 pF capacitor between  
XTAL1 and GND, thereby removing the need for an external capacitor.  
Figure 23. External RC Configuration  
VCC  
PB5 (XTAL2)  
R
XTAL1  
C
GND  
The oscillator can operate in four different modes, each optimized for a specific frequency range.  
The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL3..0 as shown in Table 9.  
Table 9. External RC Oscillator Operating Modes  
CKSEL3..0  
0101  
Frequency Range (MHz)  
0.1 - 0.9  
0110  
0.9 - 3.0  
0111  
3.0 - 8.0  
1000  
8.0 - 12.0  
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in  
Table 10.  
Table 10. Start-up Times for the External RC Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time  
SUT1..0 from Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
00  
01  
10  
11  
18 CK  
18 CK  
18 CK  
6 CK(1)  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
4.1 ms  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
Fast rising power or BOD enabled  
Notes: 1. This option should not be used when operating close to the maximum frequency of the device.  
28  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Calibrated Internal The calibrated internal RC Oscillator provides a fixed 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, or 8.0 MHz clock. All frequen-  
cies are nominal values at 5V and 25°C. This clock may be selected as the system clock by pro-  
gramming the CKSEL Fuses as shown in Table 11. If selected, it will operate with no external  
components. The CKOPT Fuse should always be unprogrammed when using this clock option.  
During Reset, hardware loads the calibration byte into the OSCCAL Register and thereby auto-  
matically calibrates the RC Oscillator. At 5V, 25°C and 1.0 MHz Oscillator frequency selected,  
this calibration gives a fre-quency within ± 3% of the nominal frequency. Using run-time calibra-  
tion methods as described in application notes available at www.atmel.com/avr it is possible to  
achieve ± 1% accuracy at any given VCC and Temperature. When this oscillator is used as the  
RC Oscillator  
chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used for the Watchdog Timer and for the reset  
time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed calibration value, see the section “Cali-  
bration Byte” on page 109.  
Table 11. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes  
CKSEL3..0  
0001(1)  
0010  
Nominal Frequency (MHz)  
1.0  
2.0  
4.0  
8.0  
0011  
0100  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
When this oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in  
Table 12. PB4 (XTAL1) and PB5 (XTAL2) can be used as general I/O ports.  
Table 12. Start-up Times for the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from  
Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
6 CK  
6 CK  
6 CK  
01  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Reserved  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10(1)  
11  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
Oscillator Calibration  
Register – OSCCAL  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$31 ($51)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
CAL7  
R/W  
CAL6  
R/W  
CAL5  
R/W  
CAL4  
R/W  
CAL3  
R/W  
CAL2  
R/W  
CAL1  
R/W  
CAL0  
R/W  
OSCCAL  
Device Specific Calibration Value  
• Bits 7..0 – CAL7..0: Oscillator Calibration Value  
Writing the calibration byte to this address will trim the internal oscillator to remove process vari-  
ations from the oscillator frequency. During Reset, the 1 MHz calibration value which is located  
in the signature row high byte (address 0x00) is automatically loaded into the OSCCAL Register.  
If the internal RC is used at other frequencies, the calibration value must be loaded manually.  
This can be done by first reading the signature row by a programmer, and then store the calibra-  
tion values in the Flash or EEPROM. Then the value can be read by software and loaded into  
the OSCCAl Register. When OSCCAL is zero, the lowest available frequency is chosen. Writing  
non-zero values to this register will increase the frequency of the internal oscillator. Writing $FF  
to the register gives the highest available frequency. The calibrated Oscillator is used to time  
29  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
EEPROM and Flash access. If EEPROM or Flash is written, do not calibrate to more than 10%  
above the nominal frequency. Otherwise, the EEPROM or Flash write may fail. Note that the  
oscillator is intended for calibration to 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, or 8.0 MHz. Tuning to other values is not  
guaranteed, as indicated in Table 13.  
Table 13. Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Range.  
Min Frequency in Percentage of  
Nominal Frequency  
Max Frequency in Percentage of  
Nominal Frequency  
OSCCAL Value  
$00  
$7F  
$FF  
50%  
75%  
100%  
150%  
200%  
100%  
External Clock  
To drive the device from an external clock source, XTAL1 should be driven as shown in Figure  
24. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL Fuses must be programmed to “0000”  
and PLLCK to “1”. By programming the CKOPT Fuse, the user can enable an internal 36 pF  
capacitor between XTAL1 and GND.  
Figure 24. External Clock Drive Configuration  
PB5 (XTAL2)  
EXTERNAL  
XTAL1  
CLOCK  
SIGNAL  
GND  
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in  
Table 14.  
Table 14. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from  
Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
6 CK  
6 CK  
6 CK  
01  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10  
11  
Reserved  
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock fre-  
quency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from  
one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behaviour. It is required to ensure that the  
MCU is kept in reset during such changes in the clock frequency.  
30  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
High Frequency  
PLL Clock –  
PLLCLK  
There is an internal PLL that provides nominally 64 MHz clock rate locked to the RC Oscillator  
for the use of the Peripheral Timer/Counter1 and for the system clock source. When selected as  
a system clock source, by programming (“0”) the fuse PLLCK, it is divided by four. When this  
option is used, the CKSEL3..0 must be set to “0001”. This clocking option can be used only  
when operating between 4.5 - 5.5V to guaratee safe operation. The system clock frequency will  
be 16 MHz (64 MHz/4). When using this clock option, start-up times are determined by the SUT  
Fuses as shown in Table 15. See also “PCK Clocking System” on page 24.  
Table 15. Start-up Times for the PLLCK  
Start-up Time from  
Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
1K CK  
1K CK  
1K CK  
16K CK  
01  
4.1 ms  
65 ms  
Fast rising power  
Slowly rising power  
Slowly rising power  
10  
11  
31  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
System Control The ATtiny26(L) provides four sources of reset:  
Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset  
threshold (VPOT).  
and Reset  
External Reset. To use the PB7/RESET pin as an External Reset, instead of I/O pin, unprogram  
(“1”) the RSTDISBL Fuse. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for  
more than 500 ns.  
Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog timer period expires and the Watchdog is  
enabled.  
Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the Brown-out Reset  
threshold (VBOT).  
During reset, all I/O Registers are then set to their initial values, and the program starts execu-  
tion from address $000. The instruction placed in address $000 must be an RJMP – Relative  
Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt  
source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these  
locations. Figure 25 shows the reset logic for the ATtiny26(L). Table 16 shows the timing and  
electrical parameters of the reset circuitry for ATtiny26(L).  
Figure 25. Reset Logic for the ATtiny26(L)  
DATA BUS  
MCU Status  
Register (MCUSR)  
Brown-Out  
BODEN  
Reset Circuit  
BODLEVEL  
Delay Counters  
Clock  
CK  
Generator  
TIMEOUT  
CKSEL[3:0]  
32  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 16. Reset Characteristics  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Power-on Reset Threshold  
1.4  
2.3  
V
Voltage (rising)  
VPOT  
Power-on Reset Threshold  
1.3  
2.3  
0.9  
1.5  
V
Voltage (falling)(1)  
VRST  
tRST  
RESET Pin Threshold Voltage  
0.2  
VCC  
µs  
Minimum pulse width on  
RESET Pin  
Brown-out Reset Threshold  
Voltage(2)  
BODLEVEL = 1  
BODLEVEL = 0  
BODLEVEL = 1  
BODLEVEL = 0  
2.4  
3.7  
2.7  
4.0  
2
2.9  
4.5  
VBOT  
V
Minimum low voltage period for  
Brown-out Detection  
µs  
µs  
tBOD  
2
VHYST  
Brown-out Detector hysteresis  
130  
mV  
Notes: 1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling)  
2. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where  
this is the case, the device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guar-  
antees that a Brown-out Reset will occur before VCC drops to a voltage where correct  
operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed using  
BODLEVEL=1 for ATtiny26L and BODLEVEL=0 for ATtiny26. BODLEVEL=1 is not applicable  
for ATtiny26.  
See start-up times from reset from “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23. When the  
CPU wakes up from Power-down, only the clock counting part of the start-up time is used. The  
Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing the real-time part of the start-up time.  
Power-on Reset  
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip Detection circuit. The detection level  
is defined in Table 16 The POR is activated whenever VCC is below the detection level. The POR  
circuit can be used to trigger the Start-up Reset, as well as detect a failure in supply voltage.  
The Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reaching the  
Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes a delay counter, which determines the delay, for  
which the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The time-out period of the delay counter can  
be defined by the user through the CKSEL Fuses. The different selections for the delay period  
are presented in “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23. The RESET signal is activated  
again, without any delay, when the VCC decreases below detection level.  
33  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 26. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Figure 27. MCU Start-up, RESET Controlled Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
External Reset  
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than 500  
ns will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to  
generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – VRST – on its  
positive edge, the delay timer starts the MCU after the Time-out period tTOUT has expired.  
Figure 28. External Reset During Operation  
VCC  
RESET  
VRST  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
34  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Brown-out  
Detection  
ATtiny26(L) has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level dur-  
ing the operation. The BOD circuit can be enabled/disabled by the fuse BODEN. When the BOD  
is enabled (BODEN programmed), and VCC decreases below the trigger level, the Brown-out  
Reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level, the Brown-out  
Reset is deactivated after a delay. The delay is defined by the user in the same way as the delay  
of POR signal, in Table 29. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the fuse  
BODLEVEL to be 2.7V (BODLEVEL unprogrammed), or 4.0V (BODLEVEL programmed). The  
trigger level has a hysteresis of 50 mV to ensure spike free Brown-out Detection.  
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for lon-  
ger than tBOD given in Table 16.  
Figure 29. Brown-out Reset During Operation  
VBOT+  
VCC  
VBOT-  
RESET  
t
TOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Watchdog Reset  
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On  
the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to  
page 78 for details on operation of the Watchdog.  
Figure 30. Watchdog Time-out  
1 CK Cycle  
35  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
MCU Status  
Register – MCUSR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$34 ($54)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
WDRF  
R/W  
BORF  
R/W  
EXTRF  
R/W  
PORF  
R/W  
MCUSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
See Bit Description  
• Bit 7..4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set (one) if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset (zero) by a Power-on Reset, or  
by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag  
This bit is set (one) if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset (zero) by a Power-on Reset, or  
by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set (one) if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset (zero) by a Power-on Reset, or  
by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set (one) if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset (zero) by writing a logic zero to  
the flag.  
To make use of the reset flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then reset  
(zero) the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another  
reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the reset flags.  
36  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Power  
Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving  
power. The AVR provides various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consump-  
tion to the application’s requirements.  
Management  
and Sleep  
Modes  
To enter any of the four sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be written to logic one and a  
SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM1, and SM0 bits in the MCUCR Register select  
which sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power Down, or Stand-by) will be activated by  
the SLEEP instruction. See Table 17 for a summary. If an enabled interrupt occurs while the  
MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for four cycles in addition  
to the start-up time, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction  
following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device  
wakes up from sleep. If a Reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes  
from the Reset Vector.  
Table 19 on page 39 presents the different clock systems in the ATtiny26, and their distribution.  
The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode.  
MCU Control  
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions.  
Register – MCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 – PUD: Pull-up Disable  
When this bit is set (one), the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and  
PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See “Con-  
figuring the Pin” on page 42 for more details about this feature.  
• Bit 5 – SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be set (one) to make the MCU enter the Sleep mode when the SLEEP instruc-  
tion is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the Sleep mode unless it is the programmers  
purpose, it is recommended to set the Sleep Enable SE bit just before the execution of the  
SLEEP instruction.  
• Bits 4,3 – SM1/SM0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 1 and 0  
These bits select between the four available Sleep modes, as shown in the following table.  
Table 17. Sleep Modes  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Idle mode  
ADC Noise Reduction mode  
Power-down mode  
Standby mode  
For details, refer to the paragraph “Sleep Modes” below.  
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
• Bits 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
37  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corre-  
sponding interrupt mask is set (one). The activity on the external INT0 pin that activates the  
interrupt is defined in the following table.  
Table 18. Interrupt 0 Sense Control(1)  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Note:  
1. When changing the ISC10/ISC00 bits, INT0 must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable  
bit in the GIMSK Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
Idle Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are written to “00”, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle  
mode, stopping the CPU but allowing Analog Comparator, ADC, USI, Timer/Counters, Watch-  
dog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and  
clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal  
ones like the Timer Overflow and USI Start and Overflow interrupts. If wake-up from the Analog  
Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can be powered down by setting  
the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce  
power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when  
this mode is entered.  
ADC Noise  
Reduction Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are written to “01”, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC  
Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the External Interrupts, the USI  
start condition detection, and the Watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode  
basically halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If  
the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart form the  
ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out  
Reset, USI start condition interrupt, an EEPROM ready interrupt, an External Level Interrupt on  
INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode.  
Power-down Mode When the SM1..0 bits are written to “10”, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-  
down mode. In this mode, the External Oscillator is stopped, while the External Interrupts, the  
USI start condition detection, and the Watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an Exter-  
nal Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out Reset, USI start condition interrupt, an External  
Level Interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU. This sleep mode basi-  
cally halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.  
When waking up from Power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs  
until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after  
having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL Fuses that define the  
reset time-out period, as described in “Clock Sources” on page 25.  
Note that if a level triggered external interrupt or pin change interrupt is used from Power-down  
mode, the changed level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. This makes the MCU  
less sensitive to noise.  
38  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
If the wake-up condition disappears before the MCU wakes up and starts to execute, e.g., a low  
level on INT0 is not held long enough, the interrupt causing the wake-up will not be executed.  
Standby Mode  
When the SM1..0 bits are “11” and an External Crystal/Resonator clock option is selected, the  
SLEEP instruction forces the MCU into the Standby mode. This mode is identical to Power-down  
with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Standby mode, the device wakes up  
in only six clock cycles.  
Table 19. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the different Sleep Modes.  
Active Clock domains  
Oscillators  
Wake-up Sources  
Main Clock  
Source Enabled  
INT0, and Pin  
Change  
USI Start  
Condition  
EEPROM  
Ready  
clkCPU  
clkFLASH  
clkIO  
X
clkADC  
X
ADC  
X
Other I/O  
X
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
X
X
X
X
ADC Noise  
Reduction  
X
X
X(2)  
X(2)  
X(2)  
X
X
X
X
X
Power-down  
Standby(1)  
X
Notes: 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source.  
2. Only level interrupt INT0.  
39  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Minimizing Power There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR  
controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep  
Consumption  
mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the device’s functions are operating. All  
functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may need special  
consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.  
Analog to Digital  
Converter  
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be dis-  
abled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next  
conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 94 for  
details on ADC operation.  
Analog Comparator  
When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering  
ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In the other sleep  
modes, the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the Analog Comparator is  
set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be dis-  
abled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled,  
independent of sleep mode. Refer to “Analog Comparator” on page 91 for details on how to con-  
figure the Analog Comparator.  
Brown-out Detector  
If the Brown-out Detector is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the  
Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODEN Fuse, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and  
hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to  
the total current consumption. Refer to “Brown-out Detection” on page 35 for details on how to  
configure the Brown-out Detector.  
Internal Voltage  
Reference  
The Internal Voltage Reference (see Table 20) will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out  
Detector, the Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as described in the  
sections above, the Internal Voltage Reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming  
power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is  
used. If the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately.  
Table 20. Internal Voltage Reference  
Symbol  
VBG  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
1.18  
40  
Max  
1.40  
70  
Units  
V
Bandgap reference voltage  
Bandgap reference start-up time  
Bandgap reference current consumption  
1.15  
tBG  
µs  
IBG  
10  
µA  
Watchdog Timer  
Port Pins  
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the  
Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume  
power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consump-  
tion. Refer to “Watchdog Timer” on page 78 for details on how to configure the Watchdog Timer.  
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The  
most important thing is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where  
the both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input buffers of the  
device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not  
needed. In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will  
then be enabled. Refer to “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 45 for details on  
which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input signal is left floating or have  
an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive power.  
40  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
I/O Ports  
Introduction  
All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports.  
This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing  
the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when chang-  
ing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if configured as  
input). Each output buffer, except reset, has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink  
and source capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins  
have individually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O  
pins have protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 31.  
Figure 31. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic  
Rpu  
Pxn  
Logic  
Cpin  
See Figure  
"General Digital I/O" for  
Details  
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” repre-  
sents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However,  
when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example,  
PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Regis-  
ters and bit locations are listed in “Register Description for I/O Ports” on page 56.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register  
– PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins  
I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all pins in  
all ports when set.  
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page  
41. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the  
device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port  
Functions” on page 46. Refer to the individual module sections for a full description of the alter-  
nate functions.  
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the  
other pins in the port as general digital I/O.  
Ports as General  
Digital I/O  
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 32 shows a functional  
description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.  
41  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 32. General Digital I/O(1)  
PUD  
Q
D
DDxn  
Q CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
RESET  
Q
D
Pxn  
PORTxn  
Q CLR  
WPx  
RRx  
RESET  
SLEEP  
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
D
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn  
Q
clk I/O  
WDx:  
RDx:  
WPx:  
RRx:  
RPx:  
WRITE DDRx  
PUD:  
SLEEP:  
clkI/O  
PULLUP DISABLE  
SLEEP CONTROL  
I/O CLOCK  
READ DDRx  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
READ PORTx PIN  
:
Note:  
1. WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP,  
and PUD are common to all ports.  
Configuring the Pin  
Each port pin consists of 3 Register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register  
Description for I/O Ports” on page 56, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the  
PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.  
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one,  
Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input  
pin.  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is  
activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to  
be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes  
active, even if no clocks are running.  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven  
high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port  
pin is driven low (zero).  
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn}  
= 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output  
low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully  
acceptable, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high  
driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to  
disable all pull-ups in all ports.  
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user  
must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn}  
= 0b11) as an intermediate step.  
42  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 21 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.  
Table 21. Port Pin Configurations  
PUD  
DDxn PORTxn (in MCUCR)  
I/O  
Pull-up Comment  
0
0
X
Input  
No  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Pxn will source current if ext. pulled  
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Input  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
low  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Output Low (Sink)  
Output High (Source)  
X
X
Output  
Output  
Reading the Pin Value Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the  
PINxn Register Bit. As shown in Figure 32, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch con-  
stitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value  
near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 33 shows a timing dia-  
gram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and  
minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.  
Figure 33. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin Value  
SYSTEM CLK  
XXX  
XXX  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd, max  
0xFF  
r17  
tpd, min  
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch  
is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the  
shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock  
goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As indi-  
cated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed  
between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.  
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indi-  
cated in Figure 34. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the  
clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is one system clock period.  
43  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 34. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value  
SYSTEM CLK  
0xFF  
r16  
out PORTx, r16  
nop  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd  
0xFF  
r17  
44  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define  
the port pins from 4 to 7 as input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7. The resulting pin  
values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able  
to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.  
Assembly Code Example(1)  
...  
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high  
; Define directions for port pins  
ldi r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)  
ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)  
out PORTB,r16  
out DDRB,r17  
; Insert nop for synchronization  
nop  
; Read port pins  
in  
r16,PINB  
...  
C Code Example  
unsigned char i;  
...  
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */  
/* Define directions for port pins */  
PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);  
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);  
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/  
_NOP();  
/* Read port pins */  
i = PINB;  
...  
Note:  
1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-  
ups are set on pins 0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3  
as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers.  
Digital Input Enable  
and Sleep Modes  
As shown in Figure 32, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the  
schmitt-trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep Controller in  
Power-down mode, Standby mode, and ADC Noise Reduction mode to avoid high power con-  
sumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2.  
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as External Interrupt pins. If the External Interrupt  
Request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by vari-  
ous other alternate functions as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 46.  
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an Asynchronous External Interrupt pin configured as  
“Interrupt on a Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external inter-  
rupt is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the  
above mentioned sleep modes, as the clamping in these sleep modes produces the requested  
logic change.  
45  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Unconnected Pins  
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even  
though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, float-  
ing inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital  
inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode, and Idle mode).  
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pullup.  
In this case, the pullup will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is  
important, it is recommended to use an external pullup or pulldown. Connecting unused pins  
directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if the pin is  
accidentally configured as an output.  
Alternate Port  
Functions  
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 35 shows  
how the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 32 can be overridden by alternate  
functions. The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but the figure serves as a  
generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family.  
Figure 35. Alternate Port Functions(1)  
PUOExn  
PUOVxn  
1
PUD  
0
DDOExn  
DDOVxn  
1
Q
D
0
DDxn  
Q CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
PVOExn  
PVOVxn  
RESET  
1
0
Pxn  
Q
D
PORTxn  
Q CLR  
DIEOExn  
DIEOVxn  
SLEEP  
WPx  
RRx  
RESET  
1
0
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
SET  
D
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn  
CLR Q  
CLR  
clk I/O  
DIxn  
AIOxn  
PUOExn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE  
PUOVxn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE  
DDOExn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE  
DDOVxn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE  
PVOExn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
PVOVxn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE  
PUD:  
WDx:  
RDx:  
RRx:  
WPx:  
RPx:  
PULLUP DISABLE  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx PIN  
DIEOExn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE  
clkI/O  
DIxn:  
AIOxn:  
:
I/O CLOCK  
DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
SLEEP:  
SLEEP CONTROL  
Note:  
1. WPx, WDx, RLx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP,  
and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.  
46  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 22 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Fig-  
ure 35 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in  
the modules having the alternate function.  
Table 22. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions  
Signal Name Full Name  
Description  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
Pull-up Override  
Enable  
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by  
the PUOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is  
enabled when {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.  
Pull-up Override  
Value  
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when  
PUOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the  
DDxn, PORTxn, and PUD Register bits.  
Data Direction  
Override Enable  
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is  
controlled by the DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared,  
the Output driver is enabled by the DDxn Register bit.  
Data Direction  
Override Value  
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled  
when DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of  
the DDxn Register bit.  
Port Value  
Override Enable  
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled,  
the port value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If  
PVOE is cleared, and the Output Driver is enabled, the  
port Value is controlled by the PORTxn Register bit.  
PVOV  
Port Value  
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV,  
Override Value  
regardless of the setting of the PORTxn Register bit.  
DIEOE  
Digital Input Enable  
Override Enable  
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by  
the DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital  
Input Enable is determined by MCU-state (Normal  
mode, sleep modes).  
DIEOV  
DI  
Digital Input Enable  
Override Value  
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled  
when DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU  
state (Normal mode, sleep modes).  
Digital Input  
This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the  
figure, the signal is connected to the output of the  
schmitt trigger but before the synchronizer. Unless the  
Digital Input is used as a clock source, the module with  
the alternate function will use its own synchronizer.  
AIO  
Analog Input/output  
This is the Analog Input/Output to/from alternate  
functions. The signal is connected directly to the pad,  
and can be used bidirectionally.  
The following subsections shortly describes the alternate functions for each port, and relates the  
overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further  
details.  
47  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
MCU Control Register The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions.  
– MCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 6 – PUD: Pull-up Disable  
When this bit is set (one), the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and  
PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See “Con-  
figuring the Pin” on page 42 for more details about this feature.  
Alternate Functions of Port A has an alternate functions as analog inputs for the ADC and Analog Comparator and pin  
Port A  
change interrupt as shown in Table 23. If some Port A pins are configured as outputs, it is  
essential that these do not switch when a conversion is in progress. This might corrupt the result  
of the conversion. The ADC is described in “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 94. Analog  
Comparator is described in “Analog Comparator” on page 91. Pin change interrupt triggers on  
pins PA7, PA6 and PA3 if interrupt is enabled and it is not masked by the alternate functions  
even if the pin is configured as an output. See details from “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62.  
Table 23. Port A Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
Alternate Function  
PA7  
ADC6 (ADC input channel 6)  
AIN1 (Analog Comparator negative input)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
PA6  
ADC5 (ADC input channel 5)  
AIN0 (Analog Comparator positive input)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
PA5  
PA4  
PA3  
ADC4 (ADC input channel 4)  
ADC3 (ADC input channel 3)  
AREF (ADC external reference)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
PA2  
PA1  
PA0  
ADC2 (ADC input channel 2)  
ADC1 (ADC input channel 1)  
ADC0 (ADC input channel 0)  
Table 24 and Table 25 relates the alternate functions of Port A to the overriding signals shown in  
Figure 35 on page 46. Thera are changes on PA7, PA6, and PA3 digital inputs. PA3 output and  
pullup driver are also overridden.  
• ADC6/AIN1 Port – A, Bit 7  
AIN1: Analog Comparator Negative input and ADC6: ADC input channel 6. Configure the port  
pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering  
with the function of the analog comparator or analog to digital converter.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate function do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate function is the Analog Comparator. Digital input is enabled on pin PA7  
also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate  
function.  
• ADC5/AIN0 Port – A, Bit 6  
48  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
AIN0: Analog Comparator Positive input and ADC5: ADC input channel 5. Configure the port pin  
as input with the internal pull-up switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering  
with the function of the Analog Comparator or analog to digital converter.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate function do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate function is the Analog Comparator. Digital input is enabled on pin PA6  
also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate  
function.  
• ADC4, ADC3 Port – A, Bit 5, 4  
ADC4/ADC3: ADC Input Channel 4 and 3. Configure the port pins as inputs with the internal  
pull-ups switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the ana-  
log to digital converter.  
• AREF/PCINT1 Port – A, Bit 3  
AREF: External Reference for ADC. Pullup and output driver are disabled on PA3 when the pin  
is used as an external reference or Internal Voltage Reference (2.56V) with external capacitor at  
the AREF pin by setting (one) the bit REFS0 in the ADC Multiplexer Selection Register  
(ADMUX).  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate function do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate function is the pin usage as an analog reference for the ADC. Digital input  
is enabled on pin PA3 also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not  
masked by the alternate function.  
Table 24. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA7..PA4  
Signal  
Name  
PA7/ADC6/  
AIN1/PCINT1  
PA6/ADC5/  
AIN0/PCINT1  
PA5/ADC4  
PA4/ADC3  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
DIEOE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PCINT1_ENABLE(1)  
ACSR[ACD]  
PCINT1_ENABLE(1)•  
ACSR[ACD]  
DIEOV  
DI  
1
1
0
0
PCINT1  
PCINT1  
AIO  
ADC6 INPUT, AIN1  
ADC5 INPUT, AIN0  
ADC4 INPUT  
ADC3 INPUT  
49  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 25. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PA3..PA0  
Signal  
Name  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
DIEOE  
PA3/AREF/PCINT1  
PA2/ADC2  
PA1/ADC1  
PA0/ADC0  
ADMUX[REFS0]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADMUX[REFS0]  
0
0
0
PCINT1_ENABLE(1)  
~(2)ADMUX[REFS0]  
DIEOV  
DI  
1
0
0
0
PCINT1  
AIO  
ANALOG REFERENCE INPUT  
ADC2 INPUT ADC1 INPUT ADC0 INPUT  
Notes: 1. Note that the PCINT1 Interrupt is only enabled if both the Global Interrupt Flag is enabled, the  
PCIE1 flag in GIMSK is set and the alternate function of the pin is disabled as described in “Pin  
Change Interrupt” on page 62  
2. Not operator is marked with “~”.  
50  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Alternate Functions Of Port B has an alternate functions for the ADC, Clocking, Timer/Counters, USI, SPI programming  
Port B  
and pin change interrupt. The ADC is described in “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 94,  
Clocking in “AVR CPU Core” on page 7, timers in “Timer/Counters” on page 64 and USI in “Uni-  
versal Serial Interface – USI” on page 80. Pin change interrupt triggers on pins PB7 - PB0 if  
interrupt is enabled and it is not masked by the alternate functions even if the pin is configured  
as an output. See details from “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62. Pin functions in programming  
modes are described in “Memory Programming” on page 107. The alternate functions are shown  
in Table 26.  
Table 26. Port B Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin Alternate Functions  
PB7  
ADC10 (ADC Input Channel 10)  
RESET (External Reset Input)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
PB6  
ADC9 (ADC Input Channel 9)  
INT0 (External Interrupt 0 Input)  
T0 (Timer/Counter 0 External Counter Clock Input)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
PB5  
PB4  
PB3  
PB2  
ADC8 (ADC Input Channel 8)  
XTAL2 (Crystal Oscillator Output)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
ADC7 (ADC Input Channel 7)  
XTAL1 (Crystal Oscillator Input)  
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)  
OC1B (Timer/Counter1 PWM Output B, Timer/Counter1Output Compare B Match  
Output)  
PCINT0 (Pin Change Interrupt 0)  
SCK (USI Clock Input/Output)  
SCL (USI External Open-collector Serial Clock)  
OC1B (Inverted Timer/Counter1 PWM Output B)  
PCINT0 (Pin Change Interrupt 0)  
PB1  
PB0  
DO (USI Data Output)  
OC1A (Timer/Counter1 PWM Output A, Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match  
Output)  
PCINT0 (Pin Change Interrupt 0)  
DI (USI Data Input)  
SDA (USI Serial Data)  
OC1A (Inverted Timer/Counter1 PWM Output A)  
PCINT0 (Pin Change Interrupt 0)  
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:  
• ADC10/RESET/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 7  
ADC10: ADC Input Channel 10. Configure the port pins as inputs with the internal pull-ups  
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog to  
digital converter.  
RESET: External Reset input is active low and enabled by unprogramming (“1”) the RSTDISBL  
Fuse. Pullup is activated and output driver and digital input are deactivated when the pin is used  
as the RESET pin.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate function do not mask the interrupt.  
51  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
The masking alternate function is the pin usage as RESET. Digital input is enabled on pin PB7  
also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate  
function.  
• ADC9/INT0/T0/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 6  
ADC9: ADC Input Channel 9. Configure the port pins as inputs with the internal pull-ups  
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog to  
digital converter.  
INT0: External Interrupt source 0: The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source  
enabled by setting (one) the bit INT0 in the General Input Mask Register (GIMSK).  
T0: Timer/Counter0 External Counter Clock input is enabled by setting (one) the bits CS02 and  
CS01 in the Timer/Counter0 Control Register (TCCR0).  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate functions are the external low level Interrupt source 0 (INT0) and the  
Timer/Counter0 External Counter clock input (T0). Digital input is enabled on pin PB6 also in  
SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate functions.  
• ADC8/XTAL2/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 5  
ADC8: ADC Input Channel 8. Configure the port pins as inputs with the internal pull-ups  
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog to  
digital converter.  
XTAL2: Chip Clock Oscillator pin 2. Used as clock pin for all chip clock sources except internal  
calibrateble RC Oscillator, external clock and PLL clock. When used as a clock pin, the pin can  
not be used as an I/O pin. When using internal calibratable RC Oscillator, External clock or PLL  
clock as Chip clock sources, PB5 serves as an ordinary I/O pin.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate functions are the XTAL2 outputs. Digital input is enabled on pin PB5 also  
in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate  
functions.  
• ADC7/XTAL1/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 4  
ADC7: ADC Input Channel 7. Configure the port pins as inputs with the internal pull-ups  
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the analog to  
digital converter.  
XTAL1: Chip Clock Oscillator pin 1. Used for all chip clock sources except internal calibrateble  
RC oscillator and PLL clock. When used as a clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.  
When using internal calibratable RC Oscillator or PLL clock as chip clock sources, PB4 serves  
as an ordinary I/O pin.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 1 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate functions are the XTAL1 inputs. Digital input is enabled on pin PB4 also  
in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate  
functions.  
• OC1B/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 3  
OC1B: Output Compare match output: The PB3 pin can serve as an output for the  
Timer/Counter1 compare match B. The PB3 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB3 set  
(one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode.  
52  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt 0 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate function is the output compare match output OC1B. Digital input is  
enabled on pin PB3 also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked  
by the alternate functions.  
• SCK/SCL/OC1B/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 2  
SCK: Clock input or output in USI Three-wire mode. When the SPI is enabled this pin is config-  
ured as an input. In the USI Three-wire mode the bit DDRB2 controls the direction of the pin,  
output for the Master mode and input for the Slave mode.  
SCL: USI External Open-collector Serial Clock for USI Two-wire mode. The SCL pin is pulled  
low when PORTB2 is cleared (zero) or USI start condition is detected and DDRB2 is set (one).  
Pull-up is disabled in USI Two-wire mode.  
OC1B: Inverted Timer/Counter1 PWM Output B: The PB2 pin can serve as an inverted output  
for the Timer/Counter1 PWM mode if USI is not enabled. The PB2 pin has to be configured as  
an output (DDB2 set (one)) to serve this function.  
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt 0 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate function are the inverted output compare match output OC1B and USI  
clocks SCK/SCL. Digital input is enabled on pin PB2 also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change  
interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate functions.  
• DO/OC1A/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 1  
DO: Data Output in USI Three-wire mode. Data output (DO) overrides PORTB1 value and it is  
driven to the port when the data direction bit DDB1 is set (one). However the PORTB1 bit still  
controls the pullup, enabling pullup if direction is input and PORTB1 is set(one).  
OC1A: Output Compare match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an output for the  
Timer/Counter1 compare match A. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set  
(one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer func-  
tion if not used in programming or USI.  
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt 0 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate functions are the output compare match output OC1A and Data Output  
(DO) in USI Three-wire mode. Digital input is enabled on pin PB1 also in SLEEP modes, if the  
pin change interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate functions.  
53  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• DI/SDA/OC1A/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 0  
DI: Data Input in USI Three-wire mode. USI Three-wire mode does not override normal port  
functions., so pin must be configure as an input.  
SDA: Serial Data in USI Two-wire mode. Serial data pin is bi-directional and uses open-collector  
output. The SDA pin is enabled by setting the pin as an output. The pin is pulled low when the  
PORTB0 or USI shiftRegister is zero when DDB0 is set (one). Pull-up is disabled in USI Two-  
wire mode.  
OC1A: Inverted Timer/Counter1 PWM output A: The PB0 pin can serve as an Inverted output for  
the PWM mode if not used in programming or USI. The PB0 pin has to be configured as an out-  
put (DDB0 set (one)) to serve this function.  
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt 0 pin. Pin change interrupt is enabled on pin when global interrupt  
is enabled, pin change interrupt is enabled and the alternate functions do not mask the interrupt.  
The masking alternate functions are the inverted output compare match output OC1A and USI  
data DI or SDA. Digital input is enabled on pin PB0 also in SLEEP modes, if the pin change  
interrupt is enabled and not masked by the alternate functions. Table 27 and Table 28 relate the  
alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals shown in “Alternate Port Functions” on  
page 46.  
Table 27. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7..PB4  
Signal  
Name  
PB7/ADC10/RESET/  
PCINT1  
PB6/ADC9/INT0/TO/  
PCINT1  
PB5/ADC8/XTAL2/  
PCINT1  
PB4/ADC7/XTAL1  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
DIEOE  
RSTDSBL(1)  
0
~(5)PB5IOENABLE(3)  
~PB4IOENABLE(3)  
1
0
0
0
RSTDSBL(1)  
0
~PB5IOENABLE(3)  
~PB4IOENABLE(3)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PCINT1_ENABLE(2) | RSTDSBL(1)  
~T0_EXT_CLOCK (6)  
PCINT1_ENABLE(2)  
~PB5IOENABLE(3)  
|
PCINT_ ENABLE (2)  
|
PCINT1_ENABLE(2)  
INT0_ENABLE(4)  
|
~PB4IOENABLE(3)  
|
EXT_CLOCK_ENABLE(7)  
PCINT1_ENABLE(2)•  
DIEOV  
PCINT1_ENABLE(2)  
~(5)RSTDSBL(1)  
1
PCINT1_ENABLE(2)  
PB5IOENABLE(3)  
PB4IOENABLE(3)  
|
EXT_CLOCK_ENABLE  
External Clock, PCINT1  
XTAL1  
DI  
PCINT1  
INT0, T0, PCINT1  
ADC9  
PCINT1  
AIO  
ADC10, RESET INPUT  
ADC8, XTAL2  
Notes: 1. RSTDISBL Fuse (active low) is described in section “System Control and Reset” on page 32.  
2. Note that the PCINT1 Interrupt is only enabled if both the Global Interrupt Flag is enabled, the PCIE1 flag in GIMSK is set  
and the alternate function of the pin is disabled as described in “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62.  
3. PB5IOENABLE and PB4IOENABLE are given by the PLLCK and CKSEL Fuses as described in “Clock Sources” on page  
25.  
4. External low level interrupt is enabled if both the Global Interrupt Flag is enabled and the INT0 flag in GIMSK is set as  
described in “External Interrupt” on page 62.  
5. Not operator is marked with “~”.  
6. The operation of the Timer/Counter0 with external clock disabled is described in “8-bit Timer/Counter0” on page 65.  
7. External clock is selected by the PLLCK and CKSEL Fuses as described in “Clock Sources” on page 25.  
54  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 28. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB0  
PB2/SCK/SCL/OC1B/PCI  
Signal Name  
PUOE  
PB3/OC1B/PCINT0  
NT0  
PB1/DO/OC1A/PCINT0  
PB0/DI/SDA/OC1A  
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
0
0
0
0
0
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
0
0
0
0
PUOV  
0
DDOE  
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
(USI_SCL_HOLD(4)  
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
DDOV  
|
(~SDA | ~PORTB0) •  
DDB0  
~(8)PORTB2) • DDB2  
PVOE  
PVOV  
OC1B_ENABLE(1)  
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
USI_THREE-WIRE(3)  
OC1A_ENABLE(1)  
|
USI_TWO-WIRE(3)DDB0  
|
OC1A_ENABLE(1)  
DDB2 | OC1B_ENABLE(1)  
OC1B  
~(USI_TWO-WIRE •  
DDB2) • OC1B  
USI_THREE-WIRE(3)  
DO(6) | ~USI_THREE-  
~(USI_TWO-WIRE•  
DDB0) •  
WIRE • OC1A_ENABLE(1)  
• OC1A  
OC1A_ENABLE(1) • OC1A  
DIEOE  
PCINT0_ENABLE(2)  
~OC1B_ENABLE(1)  
~(USI_TWO-WIRE |  
USI_THREE-WIRE |  
OC1B_ENABLE) •  
~(USI_THREE-WIRE |  
OC1A_ENABLE) •  
PCINT0_ENABLE(2)  
~(USI_TWO-WIRE(3)  
USI_THREE-WIRE(3)  
OC1A_ENABLE(1)) •  
|
|
PCINT0_ENABLE(2)  
|
PCINT0_ENABLE(2)  
|
USI_START_I.ENABLE(5)  
USI_START_I.ENABLE(5)  
DIEOV  
DI  
1
1
1
1
PCINT0  
PCINT0, SCL, SCK  
PCINT0  
PCINT0, SDA  
AIO  
Notes: 1. Enabling of the Timer/Counter1 Compare match outputs and Timer/Counter1 PWM Outputs OC1A/OC1B and OC1A/OC1B  
are described in the section “8-bit Timer/Counter1” on page 67.  
2. Note that the PCINT0 Interrupt is only enabled if both the Global Interrupt Flag is enabled, the PCIE0 flag in GIMSK is set  
and the alternate function of the pin is disabled as described in “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62.  
3. The Two-wire and Three-wire USI-modes are described in “Universal Serial Interface – USI” on page 80.  
4. Shift clock (SCL) hold for USI is in described “Universal Serial Interface – USI” on page 80.  
5. USI start up interrupt is enabled if both the Global Interrupt Flag is enabled and the USISIE flag in the USICR Register is set  
as described in “Universal Serial Interface – USI” on page 80.  
6. Data Output (DO) is valid in USI Three-wire mode and the operation is described in “Universal Serial Interface – USI” on  
page 80.  
7. Operation of the data pin SDA in USI Two-wire mode and DI in USI Three-wire mode in “Universal Serial Interface – USI” on  
page 80.  
8. Not operator is marked with “~”.  
55  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Register  
Description for I/O  
Ports  
Port A Data Register –  
PORTA  
Bit  
7
PORTA7  
R/W  
0
6
PORTA6  
R/W  
0
5
PORTA5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTA4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTA3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTA2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTA1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTA0  
R/W  
0
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
$1B ($3B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port A Data Direction  
Register – DDRA  
Bit  
7
DDA7  
R/W  
0
6
DDA6  
R/W  
0
5
DDA5  
R/W  
0
4
DDA4  
R/W  
0
3
DDA3  
R/W  
0
2
DDA2  
R/W  
0
1
DDA1  
R/W  
0
0
DDA0  
R/W  
0
$1A ($3A)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port A Input Pins  
Address – PINA  
Bit  
7
PINA7  
R
6
PINA6  
R
5
PINA5  
R
4
PINA4  
R
3
PINA3  
R
2
PINA2  
R
1
PINA1  
R
0
PINA0  
R
$19 ($39)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Port B Data Register –  
PORTB  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$18 ($38)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Port B Data Direction  
Register – DDRB  
Bit  
7
DDB7  
R/W  
0
6
DDB6  
R/W  
0
5
DDB5  
R/W  
0
4
DDB4  
R/W  
0
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
$17 ($37)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port B Input Pins  
Address – PINB  
Bit  
7
PINB7  
R
6
PINB6  
R
5
PINB5  
R
4
PINB4  
R
3
PINB3  
R
2
PINB2  
R
1
PINB1  
R
0
PINB0  
R
$16 ($36)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
56  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Interrupts  
Interrupt Vectors  
The ATtiny26(L) provides eleven interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset  
Vector, each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All the interrupts  
are assigned individual enable bits which must be set (one) together with the I-bit in the Status  
Register in order to enable the interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are automatically defined as the Reset and  
Interrupt vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in Table 29. The list also determines the  
priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level.  
RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0 etc.  
Table 29. Reset and Interrupt Vectors  
Vector No  
Program Address  
$000  
Source  
Interrupt Definition  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
RESET  
Hardware Pin and Watchdog Reset  
External Interrupt Request 0  
Pin Change Interrupt  
$001  
INT0  
$002  
I/O Pins  
$003  
TIMER1, CMPA  
TIMER1, CMPB  
TIMER1, OVF1  
TIMER0, OVF0  
USI_STRT  
USI_OVF  
EE_RDY  
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match 1A  
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match 1B  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
USI Start  
$004  
$005  
$006  
$007  
$008  
USI Overflow  
$009  
EEPROM Ready  
$00A  
ANA_COMP  
ADC  
Analog Comparator  
$00B  
ADC Conversion Complete  
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses are:  
Address Labels Code  
Comments  
$000  
$001  
$002  
$003  
$004  
$005  
$006  
$007  
$008  
$009  
$00A  
$00B  
;
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
RESET  
; Reset handler  
EXT_INT0  
PIN_CHANGE  
TIM1_CMP1A  
TIM1_CMP1B  
TIM1_OVF  
TIM0_OVF  
USI_STRT  
USI_OVF  
EE_RDY  
; IRQ0 handler  
; Pin change handler  
; Timer1 compare match 1A  
; Timer1 compare match 1B  
; Timer1 overflow handler  
; Timer0 overflow handler  
; USI Start handler  
; USI Overflow handler  
; EEPROM Ready handler  
; Analog Comparator handler  
; ADC Conversion Handler  
ANA_COMP  
ADC  
$009  
$00A  
$00B  
RESET: ldi  
r16, RAMEND ; Main program start  
SP, r16  
out  
sei  
57  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Interrupt Handling The ATtiny26(L) has two 8-bit Interrupt Mask Control Registers; GIMSK – General Interrupt  
Mask Register and TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register.  
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared (zero) and all interrupts are  
disabled. The user software can set (one) the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. The I-bit is set  
(one) when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.  
When the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the  
interrupt handling routine, hardware clears the corresponding flag that generated the interrupt.  
Some of the interrupt flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s) to  
be cleared.  
If an interrupt condition occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared (zero), the  
interrupt flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by  
software.  
If one or more interrupt conditions occur when the Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared (zero),  
the corresponding interrupt flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global Interrupt Enable  
bit is set (one), and will be executed by order of priority.  
Note that external level interrupt does not have a flag, and will only be remembered for as long  
as the interrupt condition is active.  
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and  
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
Interrupt Response  
Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles mini-  
mum. After the four clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt handling  
routine is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter (10 bits) is pushed  
onto the Stack. The vector is a relative jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes two  
clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is  
completed before the interrupt is served.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock  
cycles, the Program Counter (10 bits) is popped back from the Stack. When AVR exits from an  
interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction before any  
pending interrupt is served. Note that the Status Register – SREG – is not handled by the AVR  
hardware, neither for interrupts nor for subroutines. For the routines requiring a storage of the  
SREG, this must be performed by user software.  
General Interrupt  
Mask Register –  
GIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
PCIE1  
R/W  
0
4
PCIE0  
R/W  
0
3
2
1
0
$3B ($5B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
INT0  
R/W  
0
GIMSK  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the exter-  
nal pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the MCU  
general Control Register (MCUCR) define whether the external interrupt is activated on rising or  
falling edge, on pin change, or low level of the INT0 pin. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt  
request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt  
Request 0 is executed from program memory address $001. See also “External Interrupt” on  
page 62.  
58  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
• Bit 5 – PCIE1: Pin Change Interrupt Enable1  
When the PCIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the  
interrupt pin change is enabled on analog pins PB[7:4], PA[7:6] and PA[3]. Unless the alternate  
function masks out the interrupt, any change on the pin mentioned before will cause an interrupt.  
The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from program memory  
address $002. See also “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62.  
• Bit 4– PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable0  
When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the  
interrupt pin change is enabled on digital pins PB[3:0]. Unless the alternate function masks out  
the interrupt, any change on the pin mentioned before will cause an interrupt. The corresponding  
interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from program memory address $002. See  
also “Pin Change Interrupt” on page 62.  
• Bits 3..0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
General Interrupt Flag  
Register – GIFR  
Bit  
7
6
INTF0  
R/W  
0
5
PCIF  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
$3A ($5A)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
GIFR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag0  
When an event on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-  
bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the Interrupt Vector at  
address $001. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag  
can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. The flag is always cleared when INT0 is configured  
as level interrupt.  
• Bit 5 – PCIF: Pin Change Interrupt Flag  
When an event on pins PB[7:0], PA[7:6], or PA[3] triggers an interrupt request, PCIF becomes  
set (one). PCIE1 enables interrupt from analog pins PB[7:4], PA[7:6], and PA[3]. PCIE0 enables  
interrupt on digital pins PB[3:0]. Note that pin change interrupt enable bits PCIE1 and PCIE0  
also mask the flag if they are not set. For example, if PCIE0 is cleared, a pin change on PB[3:0]  
does not set PCIF. If an alternate function is enabled on a pin, PCIF is masked from that individ-  
ual pin. If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the  
Interrupt Vector at address $002. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.  
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. See also “Pin Change Inter-  
rupt” on page 62.  
• Bits 4..0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
Timer/Counter  
Interrupt Mask  
Register – TIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
OCIE1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCIE1B  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
TOIE1  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
$39 ($59)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TIMSK  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
59  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bit 6 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 compare match A, interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector  
$003 is executed if a compare match A occurs. The Compare Flag in Timer/Counter1 is set  
(one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register.  
• Bit 5 – OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1B bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 compare match B, interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector  
$004 is executed if a compare match B occurs. The Compare Flag in Timer/Counter1 is set  
(one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register.  
• Bit 4..3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
• Bit 2 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $005) is  
executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs. The Overflow Flag (Timer1) is set (one) in the  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR.  
• Bit 1 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $006) is  
executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs. The Overflow Flag (Timer0) is set (one) in the  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR.  
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
Timer/Counter  
Interrupt Flag Register  
– TIFR  
Bit  
7
6
OCF1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCF1B  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
TOV1  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
$38 ($58)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TIFR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
• Bit 6 – OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A  
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data  
value in OCR1A – Output Compare Register 1A. OCF1A is cleared by hardware when executing  
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF1A is cleared, after synchroniza-  
tion clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE1A, and OCF1A  
are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 A Compare Match interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 5 – OCF1B: Output Compare Flag 1B  
The OCF1B bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data  
value in OCR1B – Output Compare Register 1A. OCF1B is cleared by hardware when executing  
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF1B is cleared, after synchroniza-  
tion clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE1B, and OCF1B  
are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 B Compare Match interrupt is executed.  
• Bits 4..3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
60  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
• Bit 2 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1. TOV1 is cleared by hard-  
ware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV1 is  
cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logical one to the flag. When the SREG I-  
bit, and TOIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV1 are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 1 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV0 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hard-  
ware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared  
by writing a logical one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, and TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
Interrupt Enable), and TOV0 are set (one), the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny26(L) and always reads as zero.  
61  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
External  
Interrupt  
The External Interrupt is triggered by the INT0 pin. Observe that, if enabled, the interrupt will trig-  
ger even if the INT0 pin is configured as an output. This feature provides a way of generating a  
software interrupt. The External Interrupt can be triggered by a falling or rising edge, a pin  
change, or a low level. This is set up as indicated in the specification for the MCU Control Regis-  
ter – MCUCR. When the External Interrupt is enabled and is configured as level triggered, the  
interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held low.  
The changed level is sampled twice by the Watchdog Oscillator clock, and if both these samples  
have the required level, the MCU will wake up. The period of the Watchdog Oscillator is 1.0 µs  
(nominal) at 3.0V and 25°C. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent as  
shown in “Electrical Characteristics” on page 126.  
Pin Change  
Interrupt  
The pin change interrupt is triggered by any change on any I/O pin of Port B and pins PA3, PA6,  
and PA7, if the interrupt is enabled and alternate function of the pin does not mask out the inter-  
rupt. The bit PCIE1 in GIMSK enables interrupt from pins PB[7:4], PA[7:6], and PA[3]. PCIE0  
enables interrupt on digital pins PB[3:0].  
The pin change interrupt is different from other interrupts in two ways. First, pin change interrupt  
enable bits PCIE1 and PCIE0 also mask the flag if they are not set. The normal operation on  
most interrupts is that the flag is always active and only the execution of the interrupt is masked  
by the interrupt enable.  
Secondly, please note that pin change interrupt is disabled for any pin that is configured as an  
alternate function. For example, no pin change interrupt is generated from pins that are config-  
ured as AREF, AIN0 or AIN1, OC1A, OC1A, OC1B, OC1B, XTAL1, or XTAL2 in a fuse selected  
clock option, Timer0 clocking, or RESET function. See Table 30 for alternate functions which  
mask the pin change interrupt and how the function is enabled. For example pin change inter-  
rupt on the PB0 is disabled when USI Two-wire mode or USI Three-wire mode or  
Timer/Counter1 inverted output compare is enabled.  
If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will trigger even if the changing pin is configured as an  
output. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. Also observe that the pin  
change interrupt will trigger even if the pin activity triggers another interrupt, for example the  
external interrupt. This implies that one external event might cause several interrupts.  
The value of the programmed fuse is “0” and unprogrammed is “1”. Each of the lines enables the  
alternate function so “or” function of the lines enables the function.  
62  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 30. Alternative Functions  
Control Register[Bit Name] which  
set the Alternate Function(1)  
Bit or Fuse  
Value()  
Pin  
Alternate Function  
PA3 AREF  
ADMUX[REFS0]  
ACSR[ACD]  
1
0
0
PA6 Analog Comparator  
PA7 Analog Comparator  
ACSR[ACD]  
PB0 USI Two-wire mode  
USI Three-wire mode  
TC1 compare/PWM  
USICR[USIWM1]  
1
USICR[USIWM1,USIWM0]  
TCCR1A[COM1A1,COM1A0,PWM1A]  
01  
011  
PB1 USI Three-wire mode  
TC1 compare/PWM  
USICR[USIWM1,USIWM0]  
TCCR1A[COM1A1]  
01  
1
TCCR1A[COM1A0]  
1
PB2 USI Two-wire mode  
USI Three-wire mode  
TC1 compare/PWM  
USICR[USIWM1]  
1
USICR[USIWM1,USIWM0]  
TCCR1A[COM1B1,COM1B0,PWM1B]  
01  
011  
PB3 TC1 compare/PWM  
PB4 XTAL1, clock source  
PB5 XTAL2, clock source  
TCCR1A[COM1B1]  
TCCR1A[COM1B0]  
1
1
FUSE[PLLCK,CKSEL]  
FUSE[PLLCK,CKSEL]  
10000  
10101-11111  
FUSE[PLLCK,CKSEL]  
11001-11111  
PB6 External interrupt  
TC0 clock  
GIMSK[INT0],MCUCR[ISC01,ISC01]  
TCCR0[CS02,CS01]  
100  
11  
PB7 RESET  
RSTDISBL FUSE  
1
Notes: 1. Each line represents a bit or fuse combination which enables the function.  
A fuse value of “0” is programmed, “1” is unprogrammed.  
63  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Timer/Counters The ATtiny26(L) provides two general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counters. The Timer/Counters have  
separate prescaling selection from the separate prescaler. The Timer/Counter0 clock (CK) as  
the clock timebase. The Timer/Counter1 has two clocking modes, a synchronous mode and an  
asynchronous mode. The synchronous mode uses the system clock (CK) as the clock timebase  
and asynchronous mode uses the fast peripheral clock (PCK) as the clock time base.  
Timer/Counter0  
Prescaler  
Figure 36 below shows the Timer/Counter prescaler.  
Figure 36. Timer/Counter0 Prescaler  
CK  
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER  
CLEAR  
PSR0  
T0(PB6)  
0
CS00  
CS01  
CS02  
TIMER/COUNTER0 CLOCK SOURCE  
The four prescaled selections are: CK/8, CK/64, CK/256, and CK/1024 where CK is the oscilla-  
tor clock. CK, external source, and stop, can also be selected as clock sources.  
64  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Timer/Counter1  
Prescaler  
Figure 37 shows the Timer/Counter1 prescaler. For Timer/Counter1 the clock selections are  
between PCK to PCK/16384 and stop in asynchronous mode and CK to CK/16384 and stop in  
synchronous. The clock options are described in Table 34 on page 72 and the Timer/Counter1  
Control Register, TCCR1B. Setting the PSR1 bit in TCCR1B Register resets the prescaler. The  
PCKE bit in the PLLCSR Register enables the asynchronous mode.  
Figure 37. Timer/Counter1 Prescaler  
PSR1  
PCKE  
CK  
T1CK  
S
A
14-BIT  
T/C PRESCALER  
PCK  
(64 MHz)  
0
CS10  
CS11  
CS12  
CS13  
TIMER/COUNTER1 COUNT ENABLE  
8-bit  
Figure 38 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter0.  
Timer/Counter0  
The 8-bit Timer/Counter0 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK, or an external pin. In  
addition, it can be stopped as described in the specification for the Timer/Counter0 Control Reg-  
ister – TCCR0. The overflow status flag is found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register –  
TIFR. Control signals are found in the Timer/Counter0 Control Register – TCCR0. The interrupt  
enable/disable settings for Timer/Counter0 are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Regis-  
ter – TIMSK.  
When Timer/Counter0 is externally clocked, the external signal is synchronized with the oscilla-  
tor frequency of the CPU. To ensure proper sampling of the external clock, the minimum time  
between two external clock transitions must be at least one internal CPU clock period. The  
external clock signal is sampled on the rising edge of the internal CPU clock.  
The 8-bit Timer/Counter0 features both a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the  
lower prescaling opportunities. Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities make the  
Timer/Counter0 useful for lower speed functions or exact timing functions with infrequent  
actions.  
65  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 38. Timer/Counter0 Block Diagram  
Timer/Counter0  
Control Register –  
TCCR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
PSR0  
R/W  
0
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
$33 ($53)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TCCR0  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – PSR0: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter0  
When this bit is set (one), the prescaler of the Timer/Counter0 will be reset. The bit will be  
cleared by hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no  
effect. This bit will always be read as zero.  
• Bits 2, 1, 0 – CS02, CS01, CS00: Clock Select0, Bit 2, 1, and 0  
The Clock Select0 bits 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer0.  
Table 31. Clock 0 Prescale Select  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter0 is stopped  
CK  
CK/8  
CK/64  
CK/256  
CK/1024  
External Pin T0, falling edge  
External Pin T0, rising edge  
66  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function. The CK down divided modes are  
scaled directly from the CK oscillator clock. If the external pin modes are used, the correspond-  
ing setup must be performed in the actual Data Direction Control Register (cleared to zero gives  
an input pin).  
Timer/Counter0 –  
TCNT0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$32 ($52)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
TCNT0  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Timer/Counter0 is implemented as an up-counter with read and write access. If the  
Timer/Counter0 is written and a clock source is present, the Timer/Counter0 continues counting  
in the timer clock cycle following the write operation.  
8-bit  
Timer/Counter1  
The Timer/Counter1 has two clocking modes: a synchronous mode and an asynchronous mode.  
The synchronous mode uses the system clock (CK) as the clock timebase and asynchronous  
mode uses the fast peripheral clock (PCK) as the clock time base. The PCKE bit from the  
PLLCSR Register enables the asynchronous mode when it is set (“1”). The Timer/Counter1 gen-  
eral operation is described in the asynchronous mode and the operation in the synchronous  
mode is mentioned only if there is differences between these two modes. Figure 39 shows  
Timer/Counter1 synchronization register block diagram and synchronization delays in between  
registers. Note that all clock gating details are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter1 Reg-  
ister values go through the internal synchronization registers, which cause the input  
synchronization delay, before affecting the counter operation. The registers TCCR1A, TCCR1B,  
OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C can be read back right after writing the register. The read back  
values are delayed for the Timer/Counter1 (TCNT1) Register and flags (OCF1A, OCF1B, and  
TOV1), because of the input and output synchronization.  
This module features a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling  
opportunities. Timer/Counter1 can also support two accurate, high speed, 8-bit Pulse Width  
Modulators using clock speeds up to 64 MHz. In this mode, Timer/Counter1 and the Output  
Compare Registers serve as dual stand-alone PWMs with non-overlapping non-inverted and  
inverted outputs. Refer to page 74 for a detailed description on this function. Similarly, the high  
prescaling opportunities make this unit useful for lower speed functions or exact timing functions  
with infrequent actions.  
67  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 39. Timer/Counter1 Synchronization Register Block Diagram  
8-BIT DATABUS  
Input syncronization  
registers  
Output  
syncronization  
Output  
multiplexers  
IO-registers  
Timer/Counter1  
registers  
TCNT1  
OCR1A  
OCR1B  
OCR1C  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
OCR1A_SI  
OCR1B_SI  
OCR1C_SI  
TCCR1A_SI  
TCCR1B_SI  
S
A
TCNT_SO  
OCF1A  
OCF1B  
TOV1  
S
A
OCF1A_SO  
OCF1B_SO  
TOV1_SO  
TCNT1  
S
A
TCNT1  
OCF1A  
OCF1B  
TOV1  
TCNT1_SI  
OCF1A_SI  
OCF1B_SI  
TOV1_SI  
S
A
PCKE  
CK  
S
A
S
A
PCK  
SYNC  
MODE  
1CK delay  
no delay  
ASYNC  
MODE  
1/2PCK -1CK delay  
1PCK delay  
1/2PCK -1CK delay no delay  
Timer/Counter1 and the prescaler allow running the CPU from any clock source while the pres-  
caler is operating on the fast 64 MHz PCK clock in the asynchronous mode.  
Note that the system clock frequency must be lower than one half of the PCK frequency. Only  
when the system clock is generated from PCK dividing that by two, the ratio of the PCK/system  
clock can be exactly two. The synchronization mechanism of the asynchronous Timer/Counter1  
needs at least two edges of the PCK when the system clock is high. If the frequency of the sys-  
tem clock is too high, it is a risk that data or control values are lost.  
The following Figure 40 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.  
68  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 40. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram  
T/C1 OVER- T/C1 COMPARE T/C1 COMPARE  
FLOW IRQ MATCH A IRQ MATCH B IRQ  
OC1A  
(PB0)  
OC1A  
(PB1)  
OC1B  
(PB2)  
OC1B  
(PB3)  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
T/C CONTROL  
REGISTER 1 (TCCR1A)  
T/C CONTROL  
REGISTER 1 (TCCR1B)  
TIMER/COUNTER1  
TIMER/COUNTER1  
(TCNT1)  
T/C CLEAR  
CK  
T/C1 CONTROL  
LOGIC  
PCK  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
T/C1 OUTPUT  
COMPARE REGISTER  
(OCR1B)  
T/C1 OUTPUT  
COMPARE REGISTER  
(OCR1C)  
T/C1 OUTPUT  
COMPARE REGISTER  
(OCR1A)  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
Three status flags (overflow and compare matches) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt  
Flag Register – TIFR. Control signals are found in the Timer/Counter Control Registers TCCR1A  
and TCCR1B. The interrupt enable/disable settings are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt  
Mask Register – TIMSK.  
The Timer/Counter1 contains three Output Compare Registers, OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C,  
as the data source to be compared with the Timer/Counter1 contents. In normal mode the Out-  
put Compare functions are operational with all three Output Compare Registers. OCR1A  
determines action on the OC1A pin (PB1), and it can generate Timer1 OC1A interrupt in normal  
mode and in PWM mode. Likewise, OCR1B determines action on the OC1B pin (PB3) and it can  
generate Timer1 OC1B interrupt in normal mode and in PWM mode. OCR1C holds the  
Timer/Counter maximum value, i.e., the clear on compare match value. An overflow interrupt  
(TOV1) is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts from $FF to $00 or from OCR1C to $00. This  
function is the same for both normal and PWM mode. The inverted PWM outputs OC1A and  
OC1B are not connected in normal mode.  
In PWM mode, OCR1A and OCR1B provide the data values against which the Timer/Counter  
value is compared. Upon compare match the PWM outputs (OC1A, OC1A, OC1B, OC1B) are  
generated. In PWM mode, the Timer/Counter counts up to the value specified in the Output  
Compare Register OCR1C and starts again from $00. This feature allows limiting the counter  
“full” value to a specified value, lower than $FF. Together with the many prescaler options, flexi-  
ble PWM frequency selection is provided. Table 37 lists clock selection and OCR1C values to  
obtain PWM frequencies from 20 kHz to 250 kHz in 10 kHz steps and from 250 kHz to 500 kHz  
in 50 kHz steps. Higher PWM frequencies can be obtained at the expense of resolution.  
69  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Timer/Counter1  
Control Register A –  
TCCR1A  
Bit  
7
COM1A1  
R/W  
6
COM1A0  
R/W  
5
COM1B1  
R/W  
4
COM1B0  
R/W  
3
FOC1A  
R/W  
0
2
FOC1B  
R/W  
0
1
PWM1A  
R/W  
0
0
PWM1B  
R/W  
0
TCCR1A  
$30 ($50)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
• Bits 7, 6 – COM1A1, COM1A0: Comparator A Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a Compare  
Match with Compare Register A in Timer/Counter1. Output pin actions affect pin PB1 (OC1A).  
Since this is an alternative function to an I/O port, the corresponding direction control bit must be  
set (one) in order to control an output pin. Note that OC1A is not connected in normal mode.  
Table 32. Comparator A Mode Select  
COM1A1  
COM1A0 Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter Comparator A disconnected from output pin OC1A.  
Toggle the OC1A output line.  
Clear the OC1A output line.  
Set the OC1A output line.  
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 35 on page 75 for a detailed  
description.  
• Bits 5, 4 – COM1B1, COM1B0: Comparator B Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine any output pin action following a Compare  
Match with Compare Register B in Timer/Counter1. Output pin actions affect pin PB3 (OC1B).  
Since this is an alternative function to an I/O port, the corresponding direction control bit must be  
set (one) in order to control an output pin. Note that OC1B is not connected in normal mode.  
Table 33. Comparator B Mode Select  
COM1B1  
COM1B0 Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter Comparator B disconnected from output pin OC1B.  
Toggle the OC1B output line.  
Clear the OC1B output line.  
Set the OC1B output line.  
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 35 on page 75 for a detailed  
description.  
• Bit 3 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare Match 1A  
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the Compare Match output pin PB1 (OC1A)  
according to the values already set in COM1A1 and COM1A0. If COM1A1 and COM1A0 written  
in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new settings will be used. The Force Output Compare bit can  
be used to change the output pin value regardless of the timer value. The automatic action pro-  
grammed in COM1A1 and COM1A0 takes place as if a compare match had occurred, but no  
interrupt is generated. The FOC1A bit always reads as zero. FOC1A is not in use if PWM1A bit  
is set.  
• Bit 2 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare Match 1B  
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the Compare Match output pin PB3 (OC1B)  
according to the values already set in COM1B1 and COM1B0. If COM1B1 and COM1B0 written  
in the same cycle as FOC1B, the new settings will be used. The Force Output Compare bit can  
70  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
be used to change the output pin value regardless of the timer value. The automatic action pro-  
grammed in COM1B1 and COM1B0 takes place as if a compare match had occurred, but no  
interrupt is generated. The FOC1B bit always reads as zero. FOC1B is not in use if PWM1B bit  
is set.  
• Bit 1 – PWM1A: Pulse Width Modulator A Enable  
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1A in Timer/Counter1  
and the counter value is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C  
Register value.  
• Bit 0 – PWM1B: Pulse Width Modulator B Enable  
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1B in Timer/Counter1  
and the counter value is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C  
Register value.  
Timer/Counter1  
Control Register B –  
TCCR1B  
Bit  
7
CTC1  
R/W  
0
6
PSR1  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
CS13  
R/W  
0
2
CS12  
R/W  
0
1
CS11  
R/W  
0
0
CS10  
R/W  
0
$2F ($4F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TCCR1B  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – CTC1: Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match  
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter1 is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle  
after a compare match with OCR1C Register value. If the control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1  
continues counting and is unaffected by a compare match.  
• Bit 6 – PSR1: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1  
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter prescaler will be reset. The bit will be cleared by  
hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. This bit  
will always read as zero.  
• Bit 5..4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
71  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bits 3..0 – CS13, CS12, CS11, CS10: Clock Select Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0  
The Clock Select bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.  
Table 34. Timer/Counter1 Prescale Select  
Description  
Description  
CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10 Asynchronous Mode  
Synchronous Mode  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter1 is stopped.  
PCK  
Timer/Counter1 is stopped.  
CK  
PCK/2  
CK/2  
PCK/4  
CK/4  
PCK/8  
CK/8  
PCK/16  
CK/16  
PCK/32  
CK/32  
PCK/64  
CK/64  
PCK/128  
PCK/256  
PCK/512  
PCK/1024  
PCK/2048  
PCK/4096  
PCK/8192  
PCK/16384  
CK/128  
CK/256  
CK/512  
CK/1024  
CK/2048  
CK/4096  
CK/8192  
CK/16384  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function.  
Timer/Counter1 –  
TCNT1  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2E ($4E)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
TCNT1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
This 8-bit register contains the value of Timer/Counter1.  
Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up counter with read and write access. Due to synchronization  
of the CPU, Timer/Counter1 data written into Timer/Counter1 is delayed by one CPU clock cycle  
in synchronous mode and at most two CPU clock cycles for asynchronous mode.  
Timer/Counter1  
Output Compare  
RegisterA – OCR1A  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2D ($4D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR1A  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Output Compare Register A is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register A contains data to be continuously compared with  
Timer/Counter1. Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR1A. A compare match does  
only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1A value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and  
OCR1A to the same value does not generate a compare match.  
72  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1A after a synchronization delay follow-  
ing the compare event.  
Timer/Counter1  
Output Compare  
RegisterB – OCR1B  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2C ($4C)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR1B  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Output Compare Register B is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register B contains data to be continuously compared with  
Timer/Counter1. Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR1A. A compare match does  
only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1B value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and  
OCR1B to the same value does not generate a compare match.  
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1B after a synchronization delay follow-  
ing the compare event.  
Timer/Counter1  
Output Compare  
RegisterC – OCR1C  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$2B ($4B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR1C  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Output Compare Register C is an 8-bit read/write register.  
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register C contains data to be continuously compared with  
Timer/Counter1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1C  
value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1C to the same value does not generate a  
compare match.  
If the CTC1 bit in TCCR1B is set, a compare match will clear TCNT1 and set an Overflow Inter-  
rupt Flag (TOV1). The flag is set after a synchronization delay following the compare event.  
This register has the same function in normal mode and PWM mode.  
PLL Control and  
Status Register –  
PLLCSR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
PCKE  
R/W  
0
1
0
$29 ($29)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
PLLE  
R/W  
0/1  
PLOCK  
PLLCSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7..3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and always read as zero.  
• Bit 2 – PCKE: PCK Enable  
The PCKE bit change the Timer/Counter1 clock source. When it is set, the asynchronous clock  
mode is enabled and fast 64 MHz PCK clock is used as Timer/Counter1 clock source. If this bit  
is cleared, the synchronous clock mode is enabled, and system clock CK is used as  
Timer/Counter1 clock source. This bit can be set only if PLLE bit is set. It is safe to set this bit  
only when the PLL is locked i.e., the PLOCK bit is 1.  
• Bit 1 – PLLE: PLL Enable  
When the PLLE is set, the PLL is started and if needed internal RC Oscillator is started as a PLL  
reference clock. If PLL is selected as a system clock source the value for this bit is always 1.  
• Bit 0 – PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector  
73  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
When the PLOCK bit is set, the PLL is locked to the reference clock, and it is safe to enable PCK  
for Timer/Counter1. After the PLL is enabled, it takes about 64 µs/100 µs (typical/worst case) for  
the PLL to lock.  
Timer/Counter1  
Initialization for  
To change Timer/Counter1 to the asynchronous mode, first enable PLL, and poll the PLOCK bit  
until it is set, and then set the PCKE bit.  
Asynchronous Mode  
Timer/Counter1 in  
PWM Mode  
When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register C –  
OCR1C form a dual 8-bit, free-running and glitch-free PWM generator with outputs on the  
PB1(OC1A) and PB3(OC1B) pins. Also inverted, non-overlapping outputs are available on pins  
PB0(OC1A) and PB2(OC1B), respectively. The non-overlapping output pairs (OC1A - OC1A  
and OC1B - OC1B) are never both set at the same time. This allows driving power switches  
directly. The non-overlap time is one prescaled clock cycle, and the high time is one cycle  
shorter than the low time.  
The non-overlap time is generated by delaying the rising edge, i.e., the positive edge is one  
prescaled and one PCK cycle delayed and the negative edge is one PCK cycle delayed in the  
asynchronous mode. In the synchronous mode he positive edge is one prescaled and one CK  
cycle delayed and the negative edge is one CK cycle delayed. The high time is also one pres-  
caled cycle shorter in the both operation modes.  
Figure 41. The Non-overlapping Output Pair  
OC1x  
OC1x  
t non-overlap  
x = A or B  
When the counter value match the contents of OCR1A and OCR1B, the OC1A and OC1B out-  
puts are set or cleared according to the COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0 bits in the  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register A – TCCR1A, as shown in Table 35 below.  
Timer/Counter1 acts as an up-counter, counting from $00 up to the value specified in the Output  
Compare Register (OCR1C), and starting from $00 up again. A compare match with OC1C will  
set an Overflow Interrupt Flag (TOV1) after a synchronization delay following the compare  
event.  
74  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 35. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode  
COM1x1 COM1x0 Effect on Output Compare Pins  
OC1x not connected.  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
OC1x not connected.  
OC1x cleared on compare match. Set when TCNT1 = $01.  
OC1x set one prescaled cycle after compare match. Cleared when  
TCNT1 = $00.  
OC1x cleared on compare match. Set when TCNT1 = $01.  
OC1x not connected.  
OC1x set one prescaled cycle after compare match. Cleared when  
TCNT = $00  
OC1x not connected.  
Note that in PWM mode, writing to the Output Compare Registers OCR1A or OCR1B, the data  
value is first transferred to a temporary location. The value is latched into OCR1A or OCR1B  
when the Timer/Counter reaches OCR1C. This prevents the occurrence of odd-length PWM  
pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR1A or OCR1B. See Figure 42 for an  
example.  
Figure 42. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching  
Compare Value Changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OC1x  
Synchronized OC1x Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OC1x  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized OC1x Latch  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A or OCR1B will  
read the contents of the temporary location. This means that the most recently written value  
always will read out of OCR1A or OCR1B.  
When OCR1A or OCR1B contain $00 or the top value, as specified in OCR1C Register, the out-  
put PB1(OC1A) or PB3(OC1B) is held low or high according to the settings of  
COM1A1/COM1A0. This is shown in Table 36.  
75  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 36. PWM Outputs OCR1x = $00 or OCR1C, x = A or B  
COM1x1  
COM1x0  
OCR1x  
$00  
Output OC1x  
Output OC1x  
H
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
L
OCR1C  
$00  
L
Not connected  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Not connected  
OCR1C  
$00  
H
H
L
OCR1C  
In PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag – TOV1, is set as in normal Timer/Counter mode. Timer  
Overflow Interrupt1 operates exactly as in normal Timer/Counter mode, i.e., it is executed when  
TOV1 is set provided that Timer Overflow Interrupt and global interrupts are enabled. This also  
applies to the Timer Output Compare flags and interrupts.  
The frequency of the PWM will be Timer Clock 1 Frequency divided by (OCR1C value + 1). See  
the following equation:  
f
TCK1  
f
= -----------------------------------  
PWM  
(OCR1C + 1)  
Resolution shows how many bit is required to express the value in the OCR1C Register. It is cal-  
culated by following equation  
ResolutionPWM = log2(OCR1C + 1)  
76  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 37. Timer/Counter1 Clock Prescale Select in the Asynchronous Mode  
PWM Frequency (kHz) Clock Selection CS13..CS10 OCR1C RESOLUTION (Bits)  
20  
30  
PCK/16  
PCK/16  
PCK/8  
PCK/8  
PCK/8  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/4  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK/2  
PCK  
0101  
0101  
0100  
0100  
0100  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0011  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
199  
132  
199  
159  
132  
228  
199  
177  
159  
144  
132  
245  
228  
212  
199  
187  
177  
167  
159  
255  
212  
182  
159  
141  
127  
7.6  
7.1  
7.6  
7.3  
7.1  
7.8  
7.6  
7.5  
7.3  
7.2  
7.1  
7.9  
7.8  
7.7  
7.6  
7.6  
7.5  
7.4  
7.3  
8.0  
7.7  
7.5  
7.3  
7.1  
7.0  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
110  
120  
130  
140  
150  
160  
170  
180  
190  
200  
250  
300  
350  
400  
450  
500  
PCK  
PCK  
PCK  
PCK  
PCK  
77  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Watchdog  
Timer  
The Watchdog Timer is clocked from a separate On-chip Oscillator which runs at 1 MHz. This is  
the typical value at VCC = 5V. See characterization data for typical values at other VCC levels. By  
controlling the Watchdog Timer prescaler, the Watchdog Reset interval can be adjusted from 16  
to 2048 ms. The WDR – Watchdog Reset – instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. Eight differ-  
ent clock cycle periods can be selected to determine the reset period. If the reset period expires  
without another Watchdog Reset, the ATtiny26(L) resets and executes from the Reset Vector.  
For timing details on the Watchdog Reset, refer to page 35.  
To prevent unintentional disabling of the Watchdog, a special turn-off sequence must be fol-  
lowed when the Watchdog is disabled. Refer to the description of the Watchdog Timer Control  
Register for details.  
Figure 43. Watchdog Timer  
WATCHDOG  
Normally 1 MHz  
PRESCLALER  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
WDP0  
WDP1  
WDP2  
WDE  
MCU RESET  
Watchdog Timer  
Control Register –  
WDTCR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
WDCE  
R/W  
0
3
WDE  
R/W  
0
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
WDP0  
R/W  
0
$21 ($41)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
WDTCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..5 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny26(L) and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 4 – WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable  
This bit must be set when the WDE bit is written to logic zero. Otherwise, the Watchdog will not  
be disabled. Once written to one, hardware will clear this bit after four clock cycles. Refer to the  
description of the WDE bit for a Watchdog disable procedure. In Safety Level 1 and 2, this bit  
must also be set when changing the prescaler bits.  
• Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog Enable  
When the WDE is set (one) the Watchdog Timer is enabled, and if the WDE is cleared (zero) the  
Watchdog Timer function is disabled. WDE can be cleared only when the WDCE bit is set(one).  
To disable an enabled Watchdog Timer, the following procedure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logical one to WDCE and WDE. A logical one must be writ-  
ten to WDE even though it is set to one before the disable operation starts.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write a logical 0 to WDE. This disables the Watchdog.  
• Bits 2..0 – WDP2, WDP1, WDP0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 2, 1, and 0  
78  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The WDP2, WDP1 and WDP0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watch-  
dog Timer is enabled. The different prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods  
are shown in Table 38.  
Table 38. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select(1)  
Number of WDT  
Oscillator Cycles  
Typical Time-out  
at VCC = 3.0V  
Typical Time-out  
at VCC = 5.0V  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16K (16,384)  
32K (32,768)  
17.1 ms  
34.3 ms  
68.5 ms  
0.14 s  
0.27 s  
0.55 s  
1.1 s  
16.3 ms  
32.5 ms  
65 ms  
0.13 s  
0.26 s  
0.52 s  
1.0 s  
64K (65,536)  
128K (131,072)  
256K (262,144)  
512K (524,288)  
1,024K (1,048,576)  
2,048K (2,097,152)  
2.2 s  
2.1 s  
Note:  
1. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent. The WDR – Watchdog Reset  
– instruction should always be executed before the Watchdog Timer is enabled. This ensures  
that the reset period will be in accordance with the Watchdog Timer prescale settings. If the  
Watchdog Timer is enabled without reset, the Watchdog Timer may not start counting from  
zero.  
79  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Universal Serial The Universal Serial Interface, or USI, provides the basic hardware resources needed for serial  
communication. Combined with a minimum of control software, the USI allows significantly  
Interface – USI  
higher transfer rates and uses less code space than solutions based on software only. Interrupts  
are included to minimize the processor load. The main features of the USI are:  
Two-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master or Slave, fSCLmax = fCK/16)  
Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master, fSCKmax = fCK/2, Slave fSCKmax = fCK/4)  
Data Received Interrupt  
Wakeup from Idle Mode  
In Two-wire Mode: Wake-up from All Sleep Modes, Including Power-down Mode  
Two-wire Start Condition Detector with Interrupt Capability  
Overview  
A simplified block diagram of the USI is shown on Figure 44.  
Figure 44. Universal Serial Interface, Block Diagram  
DO  
(Output only)  
PB1  
PB0  
D
LE  
Q
DI/SDA  
(Input/Open Drain)  
3
2
USIDR  
1
0
TIM0 OVF  
3
2
0
1
SCK/SCL  
(Input/Open Drain)  
PB2  
4-bit Counter  
1
0
CLOCK  
HOLD  
[1]  
Two-wire Clock  
Control Unit  
USISR  
2
USICR  
The 8-bit Shift Register is directly accessible via the data bus and contains the incoming and  
outgoing data. The register has no buffering so the data must be read as quickly as possible to  
ensure that no data is lost. The most significant bit is connected to one of two output pins  
depending of the wire mode configuration. A transparent latch is inserted between the serial reg-  
ister output and output pin, which delays the change of data output to the opposite clock edge of  
the data input sampling. The serial input is always sampled from the Data Input (DI) pin indepen-  
dent of the configuration.  
The 4-bit counter can be both read and written via the data bus, and can generate an overflow  
interrupt. Both the serial register and the counter are clocked simultaneously by the same clock  
source. This allows the counter to count the number of bits received or transmitted and generate  
an interrupt when the transfer is complete. Note that when an external clock source is selected  
the counter counts both clock edges. In this case the counter counts the number of edges, and  
not the number of bits. The clock can be selected from three different sources: the SCK pin,  
Timer 0 overflow, or from software.  
The Two-wire clock control unit can generate an interrupt when a start condition is detected on  
the Two-wire bus. It can also generate wait states by holding the clock pin low after a start con-  
dition is detected, or after the counter overflows.  
80  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Register  
Descriptions  
USI Data Register –  
USIDR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$0F ($2F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
USIDR  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The USI uses no buffering of the serial register, i.e., when accessing the Data Register (USIDR)  
the serial register is accessed directly. If a serial clock occurs at the same cycle the register is  
written, the register will contain the value written and no shift is performed. A (left) shift operation  
is performed depending of the USICS1..0 bits setting. The shift operation can be controlled by  
an external clock edge, by a Timer/Counter0 overflow, or directly by software using the USICLK  
strobe bit. Note that even when no wire mode is selected (USIWM1..0 = 0) both the external  
data input (DI/SDA) and the external clock input (SCK/SCL) can still be used by the Shift  
Register.  
The output pin in use, DO or SDA depending on the wire mode, is connected via the output latch  
to the most significant bit (bit 7) of the Data Register. The output latch is open (transparent) dur-  
ing the first half of a serial clock cycle when an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1),  
and constantly open when an internal clock source is used (USICS1 = 0). The output will be  
changed immediately when a new MSB written as long as the latch is open. The latch ensures  
that data input is sampled and data output is changed on opposite clock edges.  
Note that the corresponding Data Direction Register (DDRB2/1) to the pin must be set to one for  
enabling data output from the Shift Register.  
USI Status Register –  
USISR  
Bit  
7
USISIF  
R/W  
0
6
USIOIF  
R/W  
0
5
USIPF  
R/W  
0
4
USIDC  
R
3
USICNT3  
R/W  
2
USICNT2  
R/W  
1
USICNT1  
R/W  
0
USICNT0  
R/W  
USISR  
$0E ($2E)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
0
The Status Register contains interrupt flags, line status flags and the counter value.  
Note that doing a Read-Modify-Write operation on USISR Register, i.e., using the SBI or CBI  
instructions, will clear pending interrupt flags. It is recommended that register contents is altered  
by using the OUT instruction only.  
• Bit 7 – USISIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag  
When Two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF flag is set (to one) when a start condition is  
detected. When output disable mode or Three-wire mode is selected and (USICSx = 0b11 &  
USICLK = 0) or (USICS = 0b10 & USICLK = 0), any edge on the SCK pin sets the flag.  
An interrupt will be generated when the flag is set while the USISIE bit in USICR and the Global  
Interrupt Enable Flag are set. The flag will only be cleared by writing a logical one to the USISIF  
bit. Clearing this bit will release the start detection hold of SCL in Two-wire mode.  
A start condition interrupt will wakeup the processor from all four sleep modes.  
• Bit 6 – USIOIF: Counter Overflow Interrupt Flag  
This flag is set (one) when the 4-bit counter overflows (i.e., at the transition from 15 to 0). An  
interrupt will be generated when the flag is set while the USIOIE bit in USICR and the Global  
Interrupt Enable Flag are set. The flag will only be cleared if a one is written to the USIOIF bit.  
Clearing this bit will release the counter overflow hold of SCL in Two-wire mode.  
A counter overflow interrupt will wakeup the processor from Idle sleep mode.  
81  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bit 5 – USIPF: Stop Condition Flag  
When Two-wire mode is selected, the USIPF flag is set (one) when a stop condition is detected.  
The flag is cleared by writing a one to this bit. Note that this is not an interrupt flag. This signal is  
useful when implementing Two-wire bus master arbitration.  
• Bit 4 – USIDC: Data Output Collision  
This bit is logical one when bit 7 in the Shift Register differs from the physical pin value. The flag  
is only valid when Two-wire mode is used. This signal is useful when implementing Two-wire  
bus master arbitration.  
• Bits 3..0 – USICNT3..0: Counter Value  
These bits reflect the current 4-bit counter value. The 4-bit counter value can directly be read or  
written by the CPU.  
The 4-bit counter increments by one for each clock generated either by the external clock edge  
detector, by a Timer/Counter0 overflow, or by software using USICLK or USITC strobe bits. The  
clock source depends of the setting of the USICS1..0 bits. For external clock operation a special  
feature is added that allows the clock to be generated by writing to the USITC strobe bit. This  
feature is enabled by write a one to the USICLK bit while setting an external clock source  
(USICS1 = 1).  
Note that even when no wire mode is selected (USIWM1..0 = 0) the external clock input  
(SCK/SCL) are can still be used by the counter.  
USI Control Register –  
USICR  
Bit  
7
USISIE  
R/W  
0
6
USIOIE  
R/W  
0
5
USIWM1  
R/W  
4
USIWM0  
R/W  
3
USICS1  
R/W  
0
2
USICS0  
R/W  
0
1
0
USITC  
W
$0D ($2D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
USICLK  
USICR  
W
0
0
0
0
The Control Register includes interrupt enable control, wire mode setting, clock select setting,  
and clock strobe.  
• Bit 7 – USISIE: Start Condition Interrupt Enable  
Setting this bit to one enables the Start Condition detector interrupt. If there is a pending inter-  
rupt when the USISIE and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag is set to one, this will immediately be  
executed. Refer to the description of “Bit 7 – USISIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag” on page 81  
for further details.  
When Two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF flag is set (to one) when a start condition is  
detected. When output disable mode or Three-wire mode is selected and (USICSx = 0b11 &  
USICLK = 0) or (USICS = 0b10 & USICLK = 0), any edge on the SCK pin sets the flag.  
• Bit 6 – USIOIE: Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable  
Setting this bit to one enables the Counter Overflow interrupt. If there is a pending interrupt when  
the USIOIE and the Global Interrupt Enable Flag is set to one, this will immediately be executed.  
Refer to the description of “Bit 6 – USIOIF: Counter Overflow Interrupt Flag” on page 81 for fur-  
ther details.  
82  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
• Bit 5..4 – USIWM1..0: Wire Mode  
These bits set the type of wire mode to be used. Basically only the function of the outputs are  
affected by these bits. Data and clock inputs are not affected by the mode selected and will  
always have the same function. The counter and Shift Register can therefore be clocked  
externally, and data input sampled, even when outputs are disabled. The relations between  
USIWM1..0 and the USI operation is summarized in Table 39.  
When Two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF flag is set (to one) when a start condition is  
detected. When output disable mode or Three-wire mode is selected and (USICSx = 0b11 &  
USICLK = 0) or (USICS = 0b10 & USICLK = 0), any edge on the SCK pin sets the flag.  
Table 39. Relations between USIWM1..0 and the USI Operation  
USIWM1 USIWM0 Description  
0
0
Outputs, clock hold, and start detector disabled. Port pins operates as  
normal.  
0
1
Three-wire mode. Uses DO, DI, and SCK pins.  
The Data Output (DO) pin overrides the PORTB1 bit in the PORTB  
Register in this mode. However, the corresponding DDRB1 bit still  
controls the data direction. When the port pin is set as input  
(DDRB1 = 0) the pins pull-up is controlled by the PORTB1 bit.  
The Data Input (DI) and Serial Clock (SCK) pins do not affect the  
normal port operation. When operating as master, clock pulses are  
software generated by toggling the PORTB2 bit while DDRB2 is set to  
output. The USITC bit in the USICR Register can be used for this  
purpose.  
1
0
Two-wire mode. Uses SDA (DI) and SCL (SCK) pins(1).  
The Serial Data (SDA) and the Serial Clock (SCL) pins are bi-  
directional and uses open-collector output drives. The output drivers  
are enabled by the DDRB0/2 bit in the DDRB Register.  
When the output driver is enabled for the SDA pin, the output driver  
will force the line SDA low if the output of the Shift Register or the  
PORTB0 bit in the PORTB Register is zero. Otherwise the SDA line  
will not be driven (i.e., it is released). When the SCL pin output driver is  
enabled the SCL line will be forced low if the PORTB2 bit in the  
PORTB Register is zero, or by the start detector. Otherwise the SCL  
line will not be driven.  
The SCL line is held low when a start detector detects a start condition  
and the output is enabled. Clearing the start condition flag (USISIF)  
releases the line. The SDA and SCL pin inputs is not affected by  
enabling this mode. Pull-ups on the SDA and SCL port pin are  
disabled in Two-wire mode.  
1
1
Two-wire mode. Uses SDA and SCL pins.  
Same operation as for the Two-wire mode described above, except  
that the SCL line is also held low when a counter overflow occurs, and  
is held low until the Counter Overflow Flag (USIOIF) is cleared.  
Note:  
1. The DI and SCK pins are renamed to Serial Data (SDA) and Serial Clock (SCL) respectively to  
avoid confusion between the modes of operation.  
83  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bit 3..2 – USICS1..0: Clock Source Select  
These bits set the clock source for the Shift Register and counter. The data output latch ensures  
that the output is changed at the opposite edge of the sampling of the data input (DI/SDA) when  
using external clock source (SCK/SCL). When software strobe or Timer0 overflow clock option is  
selected the output latch is transparent and therefore the output is changed immediately. Clear-  
ing the USICS1..0 bits enables software strobe option. When using this option, writing a one to  
the USICLK bit clocks both the Shift Register and the counter. For external clock source  
(USICS1 = 1), the USICLK bit is no longer used as a strobe, but selects between external clock-  
ing, and software clocking by the USITC strobe bit.  
Table 40 shows the relationship between the USICS1..0 and USICLK setting and clock source  
used for the Shift Register and the 4-bit counter.  
Table 40. Relations between the USICS1..0 and USICLK Setting  
Shift Register Clock  
USICS1 USICS0 USICLK Source  
4-bit Counter Clock  
Source  
0
0
0
0
0
1
No Clock  
No Clock  
Software clock strobe  
(USICLK)  
Software clock strobe  
(USICLK)  
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
X
0
0
1
Timer/Counter0 overflow  
External, positive edge  
External, negative edge  
External, positive edge  
Timer/Counter0 overflow  
External, both edges  
External, both edges  
Software clock strobe  
(USITC)  
1
1
1
External, negative edge  
Software clock strobe  
(USITC)  
• Bit 1 – USICLK: Clock Strobe  
Writing a one to this bit location strobes the Shift Register to shift one step and the counter to  
increment by one provided that the USICS1..0 bits are set to zero and by doing so selects the  
software clock strobe option. The output will change immediately when the clock strobe is exe-  
cuted i.e. in the same instruction cycle. The value shifted into the Shift Register is sampled the  
previous instruction cycle. The bit will be read as zero.  
When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1), the USICLK function is changed from  
a clock strobe to a Clock Select Register. Setting the USICLK bit in this case will select the  
USITC strobe bit as clock source for the 4-bit counter (see Table 40).  
• Bit 0 – USITC: Toggle Clock Port Pin  
Writing a one to this bit location toggles the PORTB2 (SCK/SCL) value from either from 0 to 1, or  
1 to 0. The toggling is independent of the DDRB2 setting, but if the PORTB2 value is to be  
shown on the pin the DDRB2 must be set as output (to one). This feature allows easy clock gen-  
eration when implementing master devices. The bit will be read as zero.  
When an external clock source is selected (USICS1 = 1) and the USICLK bit is set to one, writ-  
ing to the USITC strobe bit will directly clock the 4-bit counter. This allows an early detection of  
when the transfer is done when operating as a master device.  
84  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Functional  
Descriptions  
Three-wire Mode  
The USI Three-wire mode is compliant to the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) mode 0 and 1, but  
does not have the slave select (SS) pin functionality. However, this feature can be implemented  
in software if necessary. Pin names used by this mode are: DI, DO, and SCK.  
Figure 45. Three-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram  
DO  
PBx  
DI  
PBy  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SCK  
PBz  
SLAVE  
DO  
DI  
PBx  
PBy  
PBz  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SCK  
PORTBz  
MASTER  
Figure 45 shows two USI units operating in Three-wire mode, one as master and one as slave.  
The two shift Registers are interconnected in such way that after eight SCK clocks, the data in  
each register are interchanged. The same clock also increments the USI’s 4-bit counter. The  
Counter Overflow (interrupt) flag, or USIOIF, can therefore be used to determine when a transfer  
is completed. The clock is generated by the master device software by toggling the PB2 pin via  
the PORTB Register or by writing a one to the USITC bit in USICR.  
Figure 46. Three-wire Mode, Timing Diagram  
( Reference )  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CYCLE  
SCK  
SCK  
DO  
MSB  
MSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB  
LSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
DI  
A
B
C
D
E
The Three-wire mode timing is shown in Figure 46. At the top of the figure is a SCK cycle refer-  
ence. One bit is shifted into the USI Shift Register (USIDR) for each of these cycles. The SCK  
timing is shown for both external clock modes. In external clock mode 0 (USICS0 = 0), DI is  
sampled at positive edges, and DO is changed (Data Register is shifted by one) at negative  
edges. External clock mode 1 (USICS0 = 1) uses the opposite edges versus mode 0, i.e., sam-  
85  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ples data at negative and changes the output at positive edges. The USI clock modes  
corresponds to the SPI data mode 0 and 1.  
Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 46.), a bus transfer involves the following steps:  
1. The slave device and master device sets up its data output and, depending on the proto-  
col used, enables its output driver (mark A and B). The output is set up by writing the  
data to be transmitted to the serial Data Register. Enabling of the output is done by set-  
ting the corresponding bit in the port data direction register (DDRB2). Note that point A  
and B does not have any specific order, but both must be at least one half SCK cycle  
before point C where the data is sampled. This must be done to ensure that the data  
setup requirement is satisfied. The 4-bit counter is reset to zero.  
2. The master generates a clock pulse by software toggling the SCK line twice (C and D).  
The bit value on the slave and master’s data input (DI) pin is sampled by the USI on the  
first edge (C), and the data output is changed on the opposite edge (D). The 4-bit counter  
will count both edges.  
3. Step 2. is repeated eight times for a comlpete register (byte) transfer.  
4. After eight clock pulses (i.e., 16 clock edges) the counter will overflow and indicate that  
the transfer is completed. The data bytes transferred must now be processed before a  
new transfer can be initiated. The overflow interrupt will wake up the processor if it is set  
to Idle mode. Depending of the protocol used the slave device can now set its output to  
high impedance.  
SPI Master Operation  
Example  
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI master:  
SPITransfer:  
out  
ldi  
out  
ldi  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIOIF)  
USISR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)+(1<<USICS1)+(1<<USICLK)+(1<<USITC)  
SPITransfer_loop:  
out  
sbis  
rjmp  
in  
USICR,r16  
USISR,USIOIF  
SPITransfer_loop  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
The code is size optimized using only 8 instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the  
DO and SCK pins are enabled as output in the DDRB Register. The value stored in register r16  
prior to the function is called is transferred to the slave device, and when the transfer is com-  
pleted the data received from the slave is stored back into the r16 register.  
The second and third instructions clears the USI Counter Overflow Flag and the USI counter  
value. The fourth and fifth instruction set Three-wire mode, positive edge Shift Register clock,  
count at USITC strobe, and toggle SCK (PORTB2). The loop is repeated 16 times.  
86  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI Master with maximum  
speed (fsck = fck/2):  
SPITransfer_Fast:  
out  
ldi  
ldi  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)+(0<<USICS0)+(1<<USITC)  
r17,(1<<USIWM0)+(0<<USICS0)+(1<<USITC)+(1<<USICLK)  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
out  
USICR,r16 ; MSB  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16  
USICR,r17  
USICR,r16 ; LSB  
USICR,r17  
in  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
SPI Slave Operation  
Example  
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI module as a SPI slave:  
init:  
ldi  
out  
r16,(1<<USIWM0)+(1<<USICS1)  
USICR,r16  
...  
SlaveSPITransfer:  
out  
ldi  
out  
USIDR,r16  
r16,(1<<USIOIF)  
USISR,r16  
SlaveSPITransfer_loop:  
sbis  
rjmp  
in  
USISR,USIOIF  
SlaveSPITransfer_loop  
r16,USIDR  
ret  
The code is size optimized using only 8 instructions (+ ret). The code example assumes that the  
DO is configured as output and SCK pin is configured as input in the DDRB Register. The value  
stored in register r16 prior to the function is called is transferred to the master device, and when  
the transfer is completed the data received from the master is stored back into the r16 register.  
87  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Note that the first two instructions is for initialization only and needs only to be executed  
once.These instructions sets Three-wire mode and positive edge Shift Register clock. The loop  
is repeated until the USI Counter Overflow Flag is set.  
Two-wire Mode  
The USI Two-wire mode is compliant to the Inter IC (TWI) bus protocol, but without slew rate lim-  
iting on outputs and input noise filtering. Pin names used by this mode are SCL and SDA.  
Figure 47. Two-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram  
VCC  
SDA  
PBy  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
SCL  
PBz  
HOLD  
SCL  
Two-wire Clock  
Control Unit  
SLAVE  
SDA  
SCL  
PBy  
PBz  
Bit7  
Bit6  
Bit5  
Bit4  
Bit3  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit0  
PORTBz  
MASTER  
Figure 47 shows two USI units operating in Two-wire mode, one as master and one as slave. It  
is only the physical layer that is shown since the system operation is highly dependent of the  
communication scheme used. The main differences between the master and slave operation at  
this level, is the serial clock generation which is always done by the master, and only the slave  
uses the clock control unit. Clock generation must be implemented in software, but the shift  
operation is done automatically by both devices. Note that only clocking on negative edge for  
shifting data is of practical use in this mode. The slave can insert wait states at start or end of  
transfer by forcing the SCL clock low. This means that the master must always check if the SCL  
line was actually released after it has generated a positive edge.  
Since the clock also increments the counter, a counter overflow can be used to indicate that the  
transfer is completed. The clock is generated by the master by toggling the PB2 pin via the  
PORTB Register.  
The data direction is not given by the physical layer. A protocol, like the one used by the TWI-  
bus, must be implemented to control the data flow.  
88  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 48. Two-wire Mode, Typical Timing Diagram  
SDA  
1 - 7  
8
9
1 - 8  
9
1 - 8  
9
SCL  
S
P
ADDRESS  
R/W  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 48.), a bus transfer involves the following steps:  
1. The a start condition is generated by the master by forcing the SDA low line while the  
SCL line is high (A). SDA can be forced low either by writing a zero to bit 7 of the Shift  
Register, or by setting the PORTB0 bit to zero. Note that DDRB0 must be set to one for  
the output to be enabled. The slave device’s start detector logic (Figure 49.) detects the  
start condition and sets the USISIF flag. The flag can generate an interrupt if necessary.  
2. In addition, the start detector will hold the SCL line low after the master has forced an  
negative edge on this line (B). This allows the slave to wake up from sleep or complete  
its other tasks, before setting up the Shift Register to receive the address by clearing the  
start condition flag and reset the counter.  
3. The master set the first bit to be transferred and releases the SCL line (C). The slave  
samples the data and shift it into the serial register at the positive edge of the SCL clock.  
4. After eight bits are transferred containing slave address and data direction (read or  
write), the slave counter overflows and the SCL line is forced low (D). If the slave is not  
the one the master has addressed it releases the SCL line and waits for a new start  
condition.  
5. If the slave is addressed it holds the SDA line low during the acknowledgment cycle  
before holding the SCL line low again (i.e., the Counter Register must be set to 14 before  
releasing SCL at (D)). Depending of the R/W bit the master or slave enables its output. If  
the bit is set, a master read operation is in progress (i.e., the slave drives the SDA line)  
The slave can hold the SCL line low after the acknowledge (E).  
6. Multiple bytes can now be transmitted, all in same direction, until a stop condition is given  
by the master (F). Or a new start condition is given.  
If the slave is not able to receive more data it does not acknowledge the data byte it has last  
received. When the master does a read operation it must terminate the operation by force the  
acknowledge bit low after the last byte transmitted.  
Figure 49. Start Condition Detector, Logic Diagram  
USISIF  
CLOCK  
HOLD  
D Q  
D Q  
SDA  
CLR  
CLR  
SCL  
Write( USISIF)  
89  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Start Condition  
Detector  
The start condition detector is shown in Figure 49. The SDA line is delayed (in the range of 50 to  
300 ns) to ensure valid sampling of the SCL line. The start condition detector is only enabled in  
Two-wire mode.  
When Two-wire mode is selected, the USISIF flag is set (to one) when a start condition is  
detected. When output disable mode or Three-wire mode is selected and (USICSx = 0b11 &  
USICLK = 0) or (USICS = 0b10 & USICLK = 0), any edge on the SCK pin sets the flag.  
The start condition detector is working asynchronously and can therefore wake up the processor  
from the Power-down sleep mode. However, the protocol used might have restrictions on the  
SCL hold time. Therefore, when using this feature in this case the oscillator start-up time set by  
the CKSEL Fuses (see “Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 23) must also be taken  
into the consideration. Refer to the description of “Bit 7 – USISIF: Start Condition Interrupt Flag”  
on page 81 for further details.  
Alternative USI  
Usage  
When the USI unit is not used for serial communication, it can be set up to do alternative tasks  
due to its flexible design.  
Half-duplex  
Asynchronous Data  
Transfer  
By utilizing the Shift Register in Three-wire mode, it is possible to implement a more compact  
and higher performance UART than by software only.  
4-bit Counter  
The 4-bit counter can be used as a stand-alone counter with overflow interrupt. Note that if the  
counter is clocked externally, both clock edges will generate an increment.  
12-bit Timer/Counter  
Combining the USI 4-bit counter and Timer/Counter0 allows them to be used as a 12-bit  
counter.  
Edge Triggered  
External Interrupt  
By setting the counter to maximum value (F) it can function as an additional external interrupt.  
The overflow flag and interrupt enable bit are then used for the external interrupt. This feature is  
selected by the USICS1 bit.  
Software Interrupt  
The counter overflow interrupt can be used as a software interrupt triggered by a clock strobe.  
90  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Analog  
Comparator  
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin PA6 (AIN0) and negative  
pin PA7 (AIN1). When the voltage on the positive pin PA6 (AIN0) is higher than the voltage on  
the negative pin PA7 (AIN1), the Analog Comparator Output, ACO is set (one). The compara-  
tor’s output can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can  
select Interrupt triggering on comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the com-  
parator and its surrounding logic is shown in the Figure 50.  
Figure 50. Analog Comparator Block Diagram  
ACBG  
PA6  
(AIN0)  
MUX  
PA7  
(AIN1)  
MUX  
ACME  
ADC  
MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT  
Analog Comparator  
Control and Status  
Register – ACSR  
Bit  
7
6
ACBG  
R/W  
0
5
ACO  
R
4
ACI  
R/W  
0
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
ACME  
R/W  
0
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
$08 ($28)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
ACD  
R/W  
0
ACSR  
X
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is set(one), the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit can be set  
at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Compar-  
ator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can  
occur when the bit is changed.  
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select  
When this bit is set (one), it selects internal bandgap reference voltage (1.18V) as the positive  
comparator input.  
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
ACO is directly connected to the comparator output.  
91  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set (one) when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACI1  
and ACI0. The Analog Comparator Interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set (one) and  
the I-bit in SREG is set (one). ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding  
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.  
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Analog Com-  
parator interrupt is activated. When cleared (zero), the interrupt is disabled.  
• Bit 2 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable  
When the ACME bit is set (one) and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSR is zero),  
MUX3...0 in ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator,  
as shown in Table 42 on page 93. If ACME is cleared (zero) or ADEN is set (one), PA7(AIN1) is  
applied to the negative input to the Analog Comparator.  
• Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The  
different settings are shown in Table 41.  
Table 41. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings(1)  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle  
Reserved  
Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge  
Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge  
Note:  
1. When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by  
clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when  
the bits are changed.  
92  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 42. Analog Comparator Input Selection(1)  
ACME  
ADEN  
MUX3...0(3)  
XXXX  
XXXX  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
Analog Comparator Negative Input  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AIN1  
AIN1  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
0100  
0101  
0110  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6(2)  
ADC7(2)  
ADC8  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
ADC9  
ADC10  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
Notes: 1. MUX4 does not affect Analog Comparator input selection.  
2. Pin change interrupt on PA6 and PA7 is disabled if the Analog Comparator is enabled. This  
happens regardless of whether AIN1 or AIN0 has been replaced as inputs to the Analog  
Comparator.  
3. The MUX3...0 selections go into effect after one clock cycle delay.  
93  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Analog to  
Digital  
Converter  
Features  
10-bit Resolution  
±2 LSB Absolute Accuracy  
0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity  
Optional Offset Cancellation  
13 - 260 µs Conversion Time  
11 Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels  
8 Differential Input Channels  
7 Differential Input Channels with Optional Gain of 20x  
Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout  
0 - AVCC ADC Input Voltage Range  
Selectable ADC Reference Voltage  
Free Running or Single Conversion Mode  
Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete  
Sleep Mode Noise Canceler  
The ATtiny26(L) features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected to an  
11-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight differential voltage input combinations or 11  
single-ended voltage inputs constructed from seven pins from Port A and four pins from Port B.  
Seven of the differential inputs are equipped with a programmable gain stage, providing amplifi-  
cation steps of 0 dB (1x) and 26 dB (20x) on the differential input voltage before the A/D  
conversion. There are four groups of three differential analog input channel selections. All input  
channels in each group share a common negative terminal, while another ADC input can be  
selected as the positive input terminal. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).  
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold Amplifier which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC  
is held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 51.  
The ADC has an analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. The voltage on AVCC must not differ more  
than ±0.3V from VCC. See the paragraph “ADC Noise Canceling Techniques” on page 105 on  
how to connect these pins.  
An internal reference voltage of nominally 2.56V is provided On-chip, and this reference may be  
externally decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor.  
94  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 51. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic  
ADC CONVERSION  
COMPLETE IRQ  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
15  
ADC DATA REGISTER  
0
ADC MULTIPLEXER  
SELECT (ADMUX)  
ADC CTRL. & STATUS  
REGISTER (ADCSR)  
(ADCH/ADCL)  
PRESCALER  
MUX DECODER  
CONVERSION LOGIC  
VCC  
AREF  
SAMPLE & HOLD  
COMPARATOR  
INTERNAL  
2.56 V  
REFERENCE  
10-BIT DAC  
-
+
GND  
INTERNAL 1.18 V  
REFERENCE  
ADC10  
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
SINGLE ENDED /  
DIFFERENTIAL SELECTION  
POS.  
INPUT  
MUX  
ADC  
MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT  
GAIN  
AMPLIFIER  
+
-
NEG.  
INPUT  
MUX  
Operation  
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approxi-  
mation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on  
the AREF pin minus 1 LSB. Optionally, AVCC or and internal 2.56V reference voltage may be  
connected to the AREF pin by writing to the REFS bits in ADMUX. The internal voltage refer-  
ence may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve noise  
immunity.  
The analog input channel and differential gain are selected by writing to the MUX bits in  
ADMUX. Any of the 11 ADC input pins ADC10..0, as well as GND and a fixed bandgap voltage  
reference of nominally 1.18V (VBG), can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. A selec-  
tion of ADC input pins can be selected as positive and negative inputs to the differential gain  
amplifier.  
If differential channels are selected, the differential gain stage amplifies the voltage difference  
between the selected input channel pair by the selected gain factor. Note that the voltage on the  
positive input terminal must be higher than on the negative input terminal, otherwise the gain  
95  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
stage will saturate at 0V (GND). This amplified value then becomes the analog input to the ADC.  
If single ended channels are used, the gain amplifier is bypassed altogether.  
The ADC can operate in two modes – Single Conversion and Free Running mode. In Single  
Conversion mode, each conversion will have to be initiated by the user. In Free Running mode,  
the ADC is constantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The ADFR bit in ADCSR  
selects between the two available modes.  
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSR. Voltage reference and  
input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume  
power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power  
saving sleep modes.  
A conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC. This bit  
stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be set to zero by hardware when the  
conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in progress,  
the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change.  
The ADC generates a 10-bit result, which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and  
ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left  
adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.  
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read  
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the data  
registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to data registers is  
blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is  
read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read,  
ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled.  
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC  
access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt  
will trigger even if the result is lost.  
Prescaling and  
Conversion  
Timing  
Figure 52. ADC Prescaler  
Reset  
ADEN  
CK  
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER  
ADPS0  
ADPS1  
ADPS2  
ADC CLOCK SOURCE  
The successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50 kHz and  
200 kHz. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock frequency to the ADC can  
be as high as 1000 kHz to get a higher sample rate.  
96  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which divides the system clock to an acceptable ADC  
clock frequency.  
The ADPS bits in ADCSR are used to generate a proper ADC clock input frequency from any  
chip clock frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is  
switched on by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSR. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the  
ADEN bit is set, and is continuously reset when ADEN is low.  
When initiating a conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSR, the conversion starts at the fol-  
lowing rising edge of the ADC clock cycle. If differential channels are selected, the conversion  
will only start at every other rising edge of the ADC clock cycle after ADEN was set.  
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. In certain situations, the ADC needs more  
clock cycles to initialization and minimize offset errors. Extended conversions take 25 ADC clock  
cycles and occur as the first conversion after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSR is set).  
Special care should be taken when changing differential channels. Once a differential channel  
has been selected, the gain stage may take as much as 125 µs to stabilize to the new value.  
Thus conversions should not be started within the first 125 µs after selecting a new differential  
channel. Alternatively, conversions results obtained within this period should be discarded. The  
same settling time should be observed for the first differential conversion after changing ADC  
reference (by changing the REFS1:0 bits in ADMUX).  
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conver-  
sion and 13.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an extended conversion. When a conversion is  
complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion  
mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new  
conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge. In Free Running mode, a new con-  
version will be started immediately after the conversion completes, while ADSC remains high.  
Using Free Running mode and an ADC clock frequency of 200 kHz gives the lowest conversion  
time, 65 µs, equivalent to 15 kSPS. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 43.  
Figure 53. ADC Timing Diagram, Extended Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)  
Next  
Extended Conversion  
Conversion  
Cycle Number  
1
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
1
2
3
ADC Clock  
ADEN  
ADSC  
ADIF  
MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCH  
ADCL  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Sample & Hold  
97  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 54. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCH  
MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCL  
Sample & Hold  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Figure 55. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCH  
ADCL  
MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
Sample & Hold  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
Table 43. ADC Conversion Time  
Sample & Hold (Cycles from  
Start of Conversion)  
Conversion  
Time (Cycles)  
Conversion  
Condition  
Time (µs)  
125 - 500  
65 - 260  
Extended conversion  
Normal conversions  
13.5  
1.5  
25  
13  
Changing Channel The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary  
register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference  
selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference  
or Reference  
Selection  
selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the  
channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Con-  
tinuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in  
ADCSR is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after  
ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection values  
to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.  
98  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Special care should be taken when changing differential channels. Once a differential channel  
has been selected, the gain stage may take as much as 125 µs to stabilize to the new value.  
Thus conversions should not be started within the first 125 µs after selecting a new differential  
channel. Alternatively, conversion results obtained within this period should be discarded.  
The same settling time should be observed for the first differential conversion after changing  
ADC reference (by changing the REFS1:0 bits in ADMUX).  
ADC Noise  
Canceler Function  
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during ADC Noise Reduction mode  
(see “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 37) to reduce noise induced from the  
CPU core and other I/O peripherals. If other I/O peripherals must be active during conversion,  
this mode works equivalently for Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure  
should be used:  
1. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode  
must be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.  
ADEN = 1  
ADSC = 0  
ADFR = 0  
ADIE = 1  
2. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once  
the CPU has been halted.  
3. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will  
wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine.  
ADC Conversion  
Result  
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC  
Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).  
For single ended conversion, the result is  
V
1024  
IN  
ADC = --------------------------  
V
REF  
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see  
Table 45 on page 101 and Table 46 on page 102). 0x000 represents analog ground, and 0x3FF  
represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.  
If differential channels are used, the result is  
(V  
V  
) ⋅ GAIN 1024  
NEG  
POS  
ADC = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------  
V
REF  
where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative input pin,  
GAIN the selected gain factor, and VREF the selected voltage reference. Keep in mind that VPOS  
must be higher than VNEG, otherwise, the ADC value will saturate at 0x000. Figure 56 shows the  
decoding of the differential input range.  
Table 44 shows the resulting output codes if the differential input channel pair (ADCn - ADCm) is  
selected with a gain of GAIN and a reference voltage of VREF  
.
99  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 56. Differential Measurement Range  
Output Code  
0x3FF  
0x000  
0
Differential Input  
Voltage (Volts)  
V
REF/GAIN  
Table 44. Correlation Between Input Voltage and Output Codes  
VADCn  
Read code  
0x3FF  
0x3FF  
0x3FE  
...  
Corresponding decimal value  
VADCm + VREF /GAIN  
1023  
1023  
1022  
...  
VADCm + (1023/1024) VREF /GAIN  
VADCm + (1022/1024) VREF /GAIN  
...  
VADCm + (1/1024) VREF /GAIN  
VADCm  
0x001  
0x000  
1
0
Example:  
ADMUX = 0xEB (ADC0 - ADC1, 20x gain, 2.56V reference, left adjusted result)  
Voltage on ADC0 is 400 mV, voltage on ADC1 is 300 mV.  
ADCR = 1024 * 20 * (400 - 300) / 2560 = 800 = 0x320  
ADCL will thus read 0x00, and ADCH will read 0xC8. Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the  
result: ADCL = 0x20, ADCH = 0x03.  
100  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
ADC Multiplexer  
Selection Register –  
ADMUX  
Bit  
7
REFS1  
R/W  
0
6
REFS0  
R/W  
0
5
ADLAR  
R/W  
0
4
MUX4  
R/W  
0
3
MUX3  
R/W  
0
2
MUX2  
R/W  
0
1
MUX1  
R/W  
0
0
$07 ($27)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MUX0  
ADMUX  
R/W  
0
• Bit 7, 6 – REFS1, REFS0: Reference Selection Bits  
These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 45. If these bits are  
changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete  
(ADIF in ADCSR is set). The user should disregard the first conversion result after changing  
these bits to obtain maximum accuracy. If differential channels are used, using AVCC or an  
external AREF higher than (AVCC - 0.2V) is not recommended, as this will affect ADC accuracy.  
The internal voltage reference may not be used if an external reference voltage is being applied  
to the AREF pin.  
Table 45. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC  
REFS1 REFS0 Voltage Reference Selection  
0
0
1
0
1
0
AVCC  
AREF (PA3), Internal Vref turned off.  
Internal Voltage Reference (2.56 V), AREF pin (PA3) not connected.  
Internal Voltage Reference (2.56 V) with external capacitor at AREF pin  
(PA3).  
1
1
Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result  
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register.  
If ADLAR is cleared, the result is right adjusted. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted.  
Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongo-  
ing conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see “ADC Data Register – ADCL and  
ADCH” on page 104.  
• Bits 4..0 – MUX4..MUX0: Analog Channel and Gain Selection Bits  
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC.  
These bits also select the gain for the differential channels. See Table 46 for details. If these bits  
are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is  
complete (ADIF in ADCSR is set).  
101  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 46. Input Channel and Gain Selections  
Single Ended  
Input  
Positive Differential  
Negative Differential  
Input  
MUX4..0  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101(1)  
01110  
01111  
Input  
Gain  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
N/A  
ADC0  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC2  
ADC2  
ADC3  
ADC4  
ADC4  
ADC4  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC6  
ADC8  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
ADC10  
ADC1  
ADC1  
ADC1  
ADC1  
ADC1  
ADC3  
ADC3  
ADC3  
ADC3  
ADC5  
ADC5  
ADC5  
ADC5  
ADC5  
ADC9  
ADC9  
ADC9  
ADC9  
ADC9  
20x  
1x  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
20x  
20x  
1x  
10000  
10001(1)  
10010  
10011  
10100  
10101  
10110(1)  
10111  
11000  
11001  
11010  
11011(1)  
11100  
11101  
11110  
1x  
20x  
20x  
1x  
20x  
1x  
20x  
20x  
1x  
20x  
1x  
N/A  
20x  
20x  
1x  
1.18V (VBG  
)
N/A  
11111  
0V (GND)  
Note:  
1. For offset measurements only. See “Offset Compensation Schemes” on page 105.  
102  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
ADC Control and  
Status Register –  
ADCSR  
Bit  
7
ADEN  
R/W  
0
6
ADSC  
R/W  
0
5
ADFR  
R/W  
0
4
ADIF  
R/W  
0
3
ADIE  
R/W  
0
2
ADPS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADPS1  
R/W  
0
0
$06 ($26)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
ADPS0  
ADCSR  
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable  
Writing a logical “1” to this bit enables the ADC. By clearing this bit to zero, the ADC is turned off.  
Turning the ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion.  
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion  
In Single Conversion mode, a logical “1” must be written to this bit to start each conversion. In  
Free Running mode, a logical “1” must be written to this bit to start the first conversion. The first  
time ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same  
time as the ADC is enabled, a dummy conversion will precede the initiated conversion. This  
dummy conversion performs initialization of the ADC.  
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete,  
it returns to zero. When a dummy conversion precedes a real conversion, ADSC will stay high  
until the real conversion completes. Writing a 0 to this bit has no effect.  
• Bit 5 – ADFR: ADC Free Running Select  
When this bit is set (one) the ADC operates in Free Running mode. In this mode, the ADC sam-  
ples and updates the Data Registers continuously. Clearing this bit (zero) will terminate Free  
Running mode.  
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set (one) when an ADC conversion completes and the data registers are updated. The  
ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set  
(one). ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.  
Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a read-  
modify-write on ADCSR, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and  
CBI instructions are used.  
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one) and the I-bit in SREG is set (one), the ADC Conversion Complete Inter-  
rupt is activated.  
103  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
• Bits 2..0 – ADPS2..0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits  
These bits determine the division factor between the CK frequency and the input clock to the  
ADC.  
Table 47. ADC Prescaler Selections  
ADPS2  
ADPS1  
ADPS0  
Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
ADC Data Register –  
ADCL and ADCH  
ADLAR = 0  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$05 ($25)  
$04 ($24)  
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADCH  
ADCL  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
0
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADLAR = 1  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$05 ($25)  
$04 ($24)  
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADCH  
ADCL  
ADC1  
ADC0  
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers. The ADLAR bit  
in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left  
adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result is right adjusted. If the result is left adjusted  
and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL  
must be read first, then ADCH.  
• ADC9..0: ADC Conversion Result  
These bits represent the result from the conversion. For differential channels, this is the absolute  
value after gain adjustment, as indicated in Table 46 on page 102. For single ended channels,  
$000 represents analog ground, and $3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one  
LSB.  
104  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Scanning Multiple Since change of analog channel always is delayed until a conversion is finished, the Free Run-  
ning mode can be used to scan multiple channels without interrupting the converter. Typically,  
the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt will be used to perform the channel shift. However, the  
user should take the following fact into consideration:  
Channels  
The interrupt triggers once the result is ready to be read. In Free Running mode, the next  
conversioin will start immediately when the interrupt triggers. If ADMUX is changed after the  
interrupt triggers, the next conversion has already started, and the old setting is used.  
ADC Noise  
Canceling  
Techniques  
Digital circuitry inside and outside the ATtiny26(L) generates EMI which might affect the accu-  
racy of analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced  
by applying the following techniques:  
1. The analog part of the ATtiny26(L) and all analog components in the application should  
have a separate analog ground plane on the PCB. This ground plane is connected to the  
digital ground plane via a single point on the PCB.  
2. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the  
analog ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.  
3. The AVCC pin on the ATtiny26(L) should be connected to the digital VCC supply voltage  
via an LC network as shown in Figure 57.  
4. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.  
5. If some pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not switch while a  
conversion is in progress in that port.  
Offset  
Compensation  
Schemes  
The gain stage has a built-in offset cancellation circuitry that nulls the offset of differential mea-  
surements as much as possible. The remaining offset in the analog path can be measured  
directly by selecting the same channel for both differential inputs. This offset residue can be then  
subtracted in software from the measurement results. Using this kind of software based offset  
correction, offset on any channel can be reduced below one LSB.  
105  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 57. ADC Power Connections  
(MOSI/DI/SDA/OC1A) PB0  
1
PA0 (ADC0)  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
(MISO/DO/OC1A) PB1  
2
PA1 (ADC1)  
PA2 (ADC2)  
(SCK/SCL/OC1B) PB2  
3
(OC1B) PB3  
4
PA3 (AREF)  
GND  
VCC  
5
ATtiny26/L  
AVCC  
GND  
6
7
(ADC7/XTAL1) PB4  
PA4 (ADC3)  
PA5 (ADC4)  
8
9
(ADC8/XTAL2) PB5  
(ADC9/INT0/T0) PB6  
PA6 (ADC5/AIN0)  
PA7 (ADC6/AIN1)  
10  
(ADC10/RESET) PB7  
106  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Memory  
Programming  
Program and Data The ATtiny26 provides two Lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be pro-  
grammed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in Table 49. The Lock bits can only be  
erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command.  
Memory Lock Bits  
Table 48. Lock Bit Byte(1)  
Lock Bit Byte  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
LB2  
LB1  
Lock bit  
Lock bit  
Note:  
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
Table 49. Lock Bit Protection Modes  
Memory Lock Bits  
LB Mode  
LB2(2)  
LB1(2)  
Protection Type  
1
1
1
No memory lock features enabled.  
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is  
disabled in parallel and serial programming mode. The  
Fuse bits are locked in both serial and parallel  
programming mode.(1)  
2
3
1
0
0
0
Further programming and verification of the Flash and  
EEPROM is disabled in parallel and serial programming  
mode. The Fuse bits are locked in both serial and parallel  
programming mode.(1)  
Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.  
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
107  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Fuse Bits  
The ATtiny26 has two Fuse bytes. Table 50 and Table 51 describe briefly the functionality of all  
the fuses and how they are mapped into the fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical  
zero, “0”, if they are programmed.  
Table 50. Fuse High Byte  
Fuse High Byte Bit No Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
Select if PB7 is I/O pin or  
RESET pin  
1 (unprogrammed, PB7 is  
RESET pin)  
RSTDISBL(2)  
SPIEN(1)  
4
3
Enable Serial Program  
and Data Downloading  
0 (programmed, SPI prog.  
enabled)  
EEPROM memory is  
preserved through the Chip  
Erase  
1 (unprogrammed, EEPROM not  
preserved)  
EESAVE  
2
Brown out detector trigger  
level  
BODLEVEL  
BODEN  
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed, BOD  
disabled)  
Brown out detector enable  
Notes: 1. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode.  
2. When programming the RSTDISBL Fuse, Parallel Programming has to be used to change  
fuses or perform further programming.  
Table 51. Fuse Low Byte  
Fuse Low Byte Bit No Description  
Default Value  
PLLCK  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Use PLL for internal clock  
Oscillator options  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)(1)  
0 (programmed)(1)  
0 (programmed)(2)  
0 (programmed)(2)  
0 (programmed)(2)  
1 (unprogrammed)(2)  
CKOPT(3)  
SUT1  
Select start-up time  
Select start-up time  
Select Clock source  
Select Clock source  
Select Clock source  
Select Clock source  
SUT0  
CKSEL3  
CKSEL2  
CKSEL1  
CKSEL0  
Notes: 1. The default value of SUT1..0 results in maximum start-up time. See Table 12 on page 29 for  
details.  
2. The default setting of CKSEL3..0 results in internal RC Oscillator at 1 MHz. See Table 3 on  
page 25 for details.  
3. The CKOPT Fuse functionality depends on the setting of the CKSEL bits. See “System Clock  
and Clock Options” on page 23 for details.  
The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are locked if  
Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.  
108  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Latching of Fuses  
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the  
fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves programming mode. This does not apply to  
the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on  
Power-up in normal mode.  
Signature Bytes  
All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This  
code can be read in both serial and parallel mode, also when the device is locked. The three  
bytes reside in a separate address space.  
For the ATtiny26 the signature bytes are:  
1. $000: $1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).  
2. $001: $91 (indicates 2KB Flash memory).  
3. $002: $09 (indicates ATtiny26 device when $001 is $91).  
Calibration Byte  
Page Size  
The ATtiny26 stores four different calibration values for the internal RC Oscillator. These bytes  
resides in the signature row high byte of the addresses 0x0000, 0x0001, 0x0002, and 0x0003 for  
1, 2, 4, and 8 MHz respectively. During Reset, the 1 MHz value is automatically loaded into the  
OSCCAL Register. If other frequencies are used, the calibration value has to be loaded manu-  
ally, see “Oscillator Calibration Register – OSCCAL” on page 29 for details.  
Table 52. No. of Words in a Page and no. of Pages in the Flash  
Flash Size  
Page Size  
PCWORD No. of Pages  
PC[3:0] 64  
PCPAGE  
PCMSB  
1K words (2K bytes)  
16 words  
PC[9:4]  
9
Table 53. No. of Words in a Page and no. of Pages in the EEPROM  
EEPROM Size  
Page Size  
PCWORD  
No. of Pages  
PCPAGE  
EEAMSB  
128 bytes  
4 bytes  
EEA[1:0]  
32  
EEA[7:0]  
7
Parallel  
This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM  
Data memory, Memory Lock bits, and Fuse bits in the ATtiny26. Pulses are assumed to be at  
least 250 ns unless otherwise noted.  
Programming  
Parameters, Pin  
Mapping, and  
Commands  
Signal Names  
In this section, some pins of the ATtiny26 are referenced by signal names describing their func-  
tionality during parallel programming, see Figure 58 and Table 54. Pins not described in the  
following table are referenced by pin names.  
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse.  
The bit coding is shown in Table 56.  
When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The different  
Commands are shown in Table 57.  
109  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 58. Parallel Programming  
+5V  
+5V  
WR  
XA0  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
VCC  
XA1/BS2  
AVCC  
PAGEL/BS1  
PB3  
PB5  
PA7: PA0  
DATA  
OE  
RDY/BSY  
+12 V  
PB6  
RESET  
XTAL1/PB4  
GND  
Table 54. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in  
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function  
WR  
PB0  
PB1  
I
I
Write Pulse (Active low)  
XTAL Action Bit 0  
XA0  
XA1/BS2(1)  
XTAL Action Bit 1 multiplexed with Byte Select 2  
(“0” selects low byte, “1” selects 2’nd high byte)  
PB2  
PB3  
I
I
PAGEL/BS1(1)  
Program Memory and EEPROM data Page Load  
multiplexed with Byte Select 1 (“0” selects low  
byte, “1” selects high byte).  
OE  
PB5  
PB6  
I
Output Enable (Active low)  
RDY/BSY  
0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is ready  
for new command  
O
DATA  
PA7:0  
I/O Bidirectional Data bus (Output when OE is low)  
Note:  
1. The pin is used for two different control signals. In the description below, normally only one of  
the signals is referred. E.g., “give BS1 a positive pulse” equals “give PAGEL/BS1 a positive  
pulse”.  
Table 55. Pin Values used to Enter Programming Mode  
Pin  
Symbol  
Value  
PAGEL/BS1  
XA1/BS2  
XA0  
Prog_enable[3]  
Prog_enable[2]  
Prog_enable[1]  
Prog_enable[0]  
0
0
0
0
WR  
110  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table 56. XA1 and XA0 Coding(1)  
XA1 XA0 Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed  
Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by  
BS1).  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by BS1).  
Load Command  
No Action, Idle  
Note:  
1. [XA1, XA0] = 0b11 is “No Action, Idle”. As long as XTAL1 is not pulsed, the Command,  
Address, and Data Registers remain unchanged. Therefore, there are no problems using BS2  
as described below even though BS2 is multiplexed with XA1. BS2 is only asserted when  
reading the fuses (OE is low) and XTAL1 is not pulsed.  
Table 57. Command Byte Bit Coding  
Command Byte  
1000 0000  
0100 0000  
0010 0000  
0001 0000  
0001 0001  
0000 1000  
0000 0100  
0000 0010  
0000 0011  
Command Executed  
Chip Erase  
Write Fuse Bits  
Write Lock Bits  
Write Flash  
Write EEPROM  
Read Signature Bytes and Calibration Byte  
Read Fuse and Lock Bits  
Read Flash  
Read EEPROM  
111  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Parallel  
Programming  
Enter Programming  
Mode  
The following algorithm puts the device in parallel programming mode:  
Step 2-7 must be completed within 64ms.  
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 55 on page 110, RESET and Vcc to 0V.  
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between Vcc/AVcc and GND.  
3. Wait at least 60us.  
4. Apply between 4.5V - 5.5V (Same as on Vcc/AVcc) to RESET pin.  
5. Wait at least 20us.  
6. Apply between 11.5V - 12.5V to RESET pin.  
7. Wait at least 10us.  
8. Program fuses to internal clock mode, 8 MHz, with 64ms delay. (CKSEL[3..0] = 0100,  
SUT[1..0] = 10). If Lock bits are programmed, a Chip Erase command must be executed  
before changing the fuses.  
9. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.  
10. Repeat step 1 to 7 too re-enter programming mode.  
Considerations for  
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient  
Efficient Programming programming, the following should be considered.  
The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory  
locations.  
Skip writing the data value $FF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the  
EESAVE Fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.  
Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256-word  
window in Flash or 256-byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes  
reading.  
112  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Chip Erase  
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are  
not reset until the program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not  
changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are  
reprogrammed.  
Note:  
1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is programmed.  
Load Command “Chip Erase”  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”.  
3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase.  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.  
5. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low.  
6. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command.  
Programming the  
Flash  
The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 52 on page 109. When programming the Flash, the  
program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be pro-  
grammed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire Flash  
memory:  
A. Load Command "Write Flash"  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”.  
3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash.  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.  
B. Load Address Low byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low address.  
3. Set DATA = Address low byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte.  
C. Load Data Low Byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.  
2. Set DATA = Data low byte ($00 - $FF).  
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
D. Load Data High Byte  
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.  
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.  
3. Set DATA = Data high byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
E. Repeat B through D until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is loaded.  
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits address  
the pages within the FLASH. This is illustrated in Figure 59 on page 114. Note that if less than 8  
bits are required to address words in the page (pagesize < 256), the most significant bit(s) in the  
address low byte are used to address the page when performing a page write.  
113  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
F. Load Address High byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high address.  
3. Set DATA = Address high byte ($00 - $03).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte.  
G. Program Page  
1. Set BS1 to “0”.  
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data.  
RDY/BSYgoes low.  
3. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high. (See Figure 60 for signal waveforms.)  
H. Repeat B through G until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been  
programmed.  
I. End Page Programming  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation.  
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are  
reset.  
Figure 59. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages(1)  
PCMSB  
PAGEMSB  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
PCPAGE  
PCWORD  
PAGE ADDRESS  
WITHIN THE FLASH  
WORD ADDRESS  
WITHIN A PAGE  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
PAGE  
PAGE  
INSTRUCTION WORD  
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:  
00  
01  
02  
PAGEEND  
Note:  
1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 52 on page 109.  
114  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 60. Programming the Flash Waveforms(1)  
E
A
B
C
D
B
C
D
F
G
$10  
ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH  
XX  
ADDR. HIGH  
DATA  
XA1/BS2  
XA0  
PAGEL/BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET +12V  
OE  
Note:  
1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above.  
Programming the  
EEPROM  
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 53 on page 109. When programming the  
EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be  
programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM data memory is as  
follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 113 for details on Command, Address and  
Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”.  
2. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF).  
3. C: Load Data ($00 - $FF).  
J: Repeat 2 and 3 until the entire buffer is filled  
K: Program EEPROM page  
1. Set BS1 to “0”.  
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY  
goes low.  
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next page.  
(See Figure 61 for signal waveforms.)  
115  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 61. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms  
J
A
B
C
B
C
K
$11  
ADDR. LOW  
DATA  
ADDR. LOW  
DATA  
XX  
DATA  
XA1/BS2  
XA0  
PAGEL/BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET +12V  
OE  
Reading the Flash  
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on  
page 113 for details on Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”.  
2. F: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $03).  
3. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA.  
5. Set BS1 to “1”. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA.  
6. Set OE to “1”.  
Reading the EEPROM The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”  
on page 113 for details on Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”.  
2. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF).  
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA.  
4. Set OE to “1”.  
Programming the  
Fuse Low Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Fuse Low bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”  
on page 113 for details on Command and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.  
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.  
3. Set BS1 and BS2 to “0”.  
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.  
116  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Programming the  
Fuse High Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Fuse high bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”  
on page 113 for details on Command and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.  
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.  
3. Set BS1 to “1” and BS2 to “0”. This selects high data byte.  
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.  
5. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low data byte.  
Figure 62. Programming the Fuse Waveforms  
Write Fuse Low Byte  
Write Fuse High Byte  
A
C
A
C
$40  
DATA  
XX  
$40  
DATA  
XX  
DATA  
XA1/BS2  
XA0  
PAGEL/BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET +12V  
OE  
Programming the  
Lock Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on  
page 113 for details on Command and Data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”.  
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit.  
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.  
The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase.  
Reading the Fuse and The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”  
Lock Bits  
on page 113 for details on Command loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”.  
2. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The status of the Fuse Low bits can now be  
read at DATA (“0” means programmed).  
3. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1”, and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Fuse High bits can now be  
read at DATA (“0” means programmed).  
4. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0”, and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at  
DATA (“0” means programmed).  
5. Set OE to “1”.  
117  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 63. Mapping Between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse- and Lock-bits During Read  
Fuse Low Byte  
0
DATA  
0
1
Lock Bits  
1
BS1  
Fuse High Byte  
BS2  
Reading the Signature The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to Programming the Flash for  
Bytes  
details on Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.  
2. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $02).  
3. Set OE to “0” and BS1 to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA.  
4. Set OE to “1”.  
Reading the  
Calibration Byte  
The algorithm for reading the Calibration byte is as follows (refer to Programming the Flash for  
details on Command and Address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.  
2. B: Load Address Low Byte.  
3. Set OE to “0” and BS1 to “1”. The Calibration byte can now be read at DATA.  
4. Set OE to “1”.  
Parallel Programming Figure 64. Parallel Programming Timing, Including some General Timing Requirements  
Characteristics  
tXHXL  
tXLWL  
tXLDX  
XTAL1  
tDVXH  
Data & Contol  
(DATA, XA0, XA1/BS2  
PAGEL/BS1)  
tBVWL  
tWLBX  
tWLWH  
WR  
WLRL  
RDY/BSY  
tWLRH  
118  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 65. Parallel Programming Timing, Loading Sequence with Timing Requirements(1)  
LOAD ADDRESS  
(LOW BYTE)  
LOAD DATA  
(LOW BYTE)  
LOAD DATA  
(HIGH BYTE)  
LOAD ADDRESS  
(LOW BYTE)  
tXLXH  
tXLXH  
tXLXH  
XTAL1  
PAGEL/BS1  
DATA  
ADDR0 (Low Byte)  
DATA (Low Byte)  
DATA (High Byte)  
ADDR1 (Low Byte)  
XA0  
XA1/BS2  
Note:  
1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 64 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to loading  
operation.  
Figure 66. Parallel Programming Timing, Reading Sequence (Within the Same Page) with Tim-  
ing Requirements()  
LOAD ADDRESS  
(LOW BYTE)  
READ DATA  
(LOW BYTE)  
READ DATA  
(HIGH BYTE)  
LOAD ADDRESS  
(LOW BYTE)  
tXLOL  
XTAL1  
tBHDV  
PAGEL/BS1  
tOLDV  
OE  
tOHDZ  
ADDR1 (Low Byte)  
DATA (High Byte)  
DATA  
ADDR0 (Low Byte)  
DATA (Low Byte)  
XA0  
XA1/BS2  
Note:  
1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 64 (i.e. tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to reading  
operation.  
119  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 58. Parallel Programming Characteristics, VCC = 5V ± 10%  
Symbol  
VPP  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
12.5  
250  
Units  
V
Programming Enable Voltage  
Programming Enable Current  
Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High  
XTAL1 Low to XTAL1 High  
XTAL1 Pulse Width High  
11.5  
IPP  
μA  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
μs  
ms  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDVXH  
tXLXH  
tXHXL  
tXLDX  
tXLWL  
tWLBX  
tBVWL  
tWLWH  
tWLRL  
tWLRH  
tWLRH_CE  
tXLOL  
tBVDV  
tOLDV  
tOHDZ  
67  
200  
150  
67  
0
Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low  
XTAL1 Low to WR Low  
BS2/1 Hold after WR Low  
BS1 Valid to WR Low  
67  
67  
150  
0
WR Pulse Width Low  
WR Low to RDY/BSY Low  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High(1)  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase(2)  
XTAL1 Low to OE Low  
1
4.5  
9
3.7  
7.5  
0
BS1 Valid to DATA valid  
0
250  
250  
250  
OE Low to DATA Valid  
OE High to DATA Tri-stated  
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write Flash, Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock bits  
commands.  
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command.  
120  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Serial  
Downloading  
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while  
RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (out-  
put). After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first  
before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 59 on page 121, the pin  
mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal  
SPI interface. Note that throughout the description about Serial downloading, MOSI and MISO  
are used to describe the serial data in and serial data out respectively.  
Serial  
Programming Pin  
Mapping  
Table 59. Pin Mapping Serial Programming  
Symbol  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
Pins  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
I/O  
Description  
Serial data in  
Serial data out  
Serial clock  
I
O
I
Figure 67. Serial Programming and Verify(1)  
2.7 - 5.5V  
VCC  
2.7 - 5.5V(2)  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
MOSI  
MISO  
AVCC  
SCK  
XTAL1  
RESET  
GND  
Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal oscillator, there is no need to connect a clock source to  
the XTAL1 pin.  
2. VCC -0.3V < AVCC < VCC +0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 2.7 - 5.5V.  
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming  
operation (in the serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase instruc-  
tion. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the Program  
and EEPROM arrays into $FF.  
Depending on CKSEL Fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods  
for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:  
Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck 12 MHz  
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck 12 MHz  
121  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
SPI Serial  
When writing serial data to the ATtiny26, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.  
Programming  
Algorithm  
When reading data from the ATtiny26, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure  
68, Figure 69, and Table 69 for timing details.  
To program and verify the ATtiny26 in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is  
recommended (See four byte instruction formats in Table 61):  
1. Power-up sequence:  
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some sys-  
tems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during Power-up. In this  
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration  
after SCK has been set to “0”.  
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming  
Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI.  
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchro-  
nization. When in synchronize the second byte ($53), will echo back when issuing the  
third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all 4  
bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the $53 did not echo back, give RESET a  
positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.  
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The page size is found in Table 52 on  
page 109. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying the 4 LSB of the  
address and data together with the Load Program Memory Page instruction. To ensure  
correct loading of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is  
applied for given address. The Program Memory Page is stored by loading the Write Pro-  
gram Memory Page instruction with the 6 MSB of the address. If polling is not used, the  
user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page. (See Table 60). Accessing  
the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in  
incorrect programming.  
5. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and  
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first  
automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not used, the user must wait  
at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See Table 60). In a chip erased device,  
no $FFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.  
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the con-  
tent at the selected address at serial output MISO.  
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal  
operation.  
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):  
Set RESET to “1”.  
Turn VCC power off.  
122  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Data Polling Flash  
When a page is being programmed into the Flash, reading an address location within the page  
being programmed will give the value $FF. At the time the device is ready for a new page, the  
programmed value will read correctly. This is used to determine when the next page can be writ-  
ten. Note that the entire page is written simultaneously and any address within the page can be  
used for polling. Data polling of the Flash will not work for the value $FF, so when programming  
this value, the user will have to wait for at least tWD_FLASH before programming the next page. As  
a chip-erased device contains $FF in all locations, programming of addresses that are meant to  
contain $FF, can be skipped. See Table 60 for tWD_FLASH value.  
Data Polling EEPROM When a new byte has been written and is being programmed into EEPROM, reading the  
address location being programmed will give the value $FF. At the time the device is ready for a  
new byte, the programmed value will read correctly. This is used to determine when the next  
byte can be written. This will not work for the value $FF, but the user should have the following in  
mind: As a chip-erased device contains $FF in all locations, programming of addresses that are  
meant to contain $FF, can be skipped. This does not apply if the EEPROM is re-programmed  
without chip-erasing the device. In this case, data polling cannot be used for the value $FF, and  
the user will have to wait at least tWD_EEPROM before programming the next byte. See Table 60 for  
tWD_EEPROM value.  
Table 60. Minimum Wait Delay before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location  
Symbol  
Minimum Wait Delay  
4.5 ms  
tWD_FLASH  
tWD_EEPROM  
tWD_ERASE  
tWD_FUSE  
9.0 ms  
9.0 ms  
4.5 ms  
Figure 68. Serial Programming Waveforms  
SERIAL DATA INPUT  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
(MOSI)  
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT  
MSB  
(MISO)  
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT  
(SCK)  
SAMPLE  
123  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 61. Serial Programming Instruction Set  
Instruction  
Instruction Format  
Byte 2 Byte 3  
Operation  
Byte 1  
Byte4  
Programming Enable  
1010 1100 0101 0011 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Enable Serial Programming after  
RESET goes low.  
Chip Erase  
1010 1100 100x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.  
Read Program Memory  
0010 H000 xxxx xxaa bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read H (high or low) data o from  
Program memory at word address a:b.  
Load Program Memory Page  
0100 H000 xxxx xxxx xxxx bbbb iiii iiii Write H (high or low) data i to Program  
Memory page at word address b. Data  
low byte must be loaded before data  
high byte is applied within the same  
address.  
Write Program Memory Page 0100 1100 xxxx xxaa bbbb xxxx xxxx xxxx Write Program Memory Page at  
address a:b.  
Read EEPROM Memory  
Write EEPROM Memory  
Read Lock Bits  
1010 0000 xxxx xxxx xbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read data o from EEPROM memory at  
address b.  
1100 0000 xxxx xxxx xbbb bbbb iiii iiii Write data i to EEPROM memory at  
address b.  
0101 1000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxoo Read Lock bits. “0” = programmed, “1”  
= unprogrammed. See Table 48 on  
page 107 for details.  
Write Lock Bits  
1010 1100 111x xxxx xxxx xxxx 1111 11ii Write Lock bits. Set bits = “0” to  
program Lock bits. See Table 48 on  
page 107 for details.  
Read Signature Byte  
Write Fuse Bits  
0011 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxbb oooo oooo Read Signature Byte o at address b.  
1010 1100 1010 0000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to  
unprogram. See Table 51 on page  
108 for details.  
Write Fuse High Bits  
Read Fuse Bits  
1010 1100 1010 1000 xxxx xxxx xxxi iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to  
unprogram. See Table 50 on page  
108 for details.  
0101 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Fuse bits. “0” = programmed, “1”  
= unprogrammed. See Table 51 on  
page 108 for details.  
Read Fuse High Bits  
0101 1000 0000 1000 xxxx xxxx xxxo oooo Read Fuse high bits.  
“0” = programmed,  
“1” = unprogrammed. See Table 50  
on page 108 for details.  
Read Calibration Byte  
0011 1000 xxxx xxxx 0000 00bb oooo oooo Read Calibration Byte o.  
Note:  
a = address high bits  
b = address low bits  
H = 0 – Low byte, 1 – High Byte  
o = data out  
i = data in  
x = don’t care  
124  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Serial Programming  
Characteristics  
Figure 69. Serial Programming Timing  
MOSI  
tSLSH  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
SCK  
tSHSL  
MISO  
tSLIV  
Table 62. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V (Unless  
Otherwise Noted)(1)  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5 V)  
Oscillator Period (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5 V)  
Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 4.5 - 5.5 V)  
Oscillator Period (VCC = 4.5 - 5.5 V)  
SCK Pulse Width High  
8
125  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
0
16  
MHz  
ns  
62.5  
2 tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
(1)  
(1)  
tSHSL  
ns  
tSLSH  
SCK Pulse Width Low  
ns  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
tSLIV  
MOSI Setup to SCK High  
tCLCL  
ns  
MOSI Hold after SCK High  
SCK Low to MISO Valid  
2 tCLCL  
ns  
20  
ns  
Note:  
1. 2 tCLCL for fck < 12 MHz, 3 tCLCL for fck >= 12 MHz  
125  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Electrical Characteristics  
Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
*NOTICE:  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute  
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-  
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or  
other conditions beyond those indicated in the  
operational sections of this specification is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C  
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C  
Voltage on Any Pin except RESET  
with Respect to Ground..............................-0.5V to VCC+ 0.5V  
Voltage on RESET with Respect to Ground ....-0.5V to +13.0V  
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V  
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA  
DC Current VCC and GND Pins ................................ 200.0 mA  
DC Characteristics  
TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min.  
Typ.(1)  
Max.  
Units  
Except XTAL1 pin and  
RESET pins  
(2)  
VIL  
Input Low Voltage  
-0.5  
0.2VCC  
V
Except XTAL1 and  
RESET pins  
(3)  
(3)  
VIH  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
0.6VCC  
VCC +0.5  
V
V
V
XTAL1 pin, External  
Clock Selected  
(2)  
VIL1  
VIH1  
-0.5  
0.1VCC  
XTAL1 pin, External  
Clock Selected  
0.8VCC  
VCC +0.5  
(2)  
VIL2  
VIH2  
VIL3  
VIH3  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
RESET pin  
-0.5  
0.9VCC  
-0.5  
0.2VCC  
V
V
V
V
(3)  
RESET pin  
VCC +0.5  
(2)  
RESET pin as I/O  
RESET pin as I/O  
0.2VCC  
(3)  
0.6VCC  
VCC +0.5  
Output Low Voltage(4)  
(Ports A, B)  
I
OL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V  
0.7  
0.5  
V
V
VOL  
VOH  
IIL  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V  
Output High Voltage(5)  
(Ports A, B)  
I
OH = -20 mA, VCC = 5V  
4.2  
2.3  
V
V
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 3V  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
VCC = 5.5V, pin low  
(absolute value)  
1
1
µA  
µA  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
VCC = 5.5V, pin high  
(absolute value)  
IIH  
RRST  
Rpu  
Reset Pull-up Resistor  
I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor  
20  
20  
100  
100  
kΩ  
kΩ  
126  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) (Continued)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min.  
Typ.(1)  
Max.  
Units  
Active 1 MHz, VCC = 3V  
(ATtiny26L)  
0.70  
mA  
Active 4 MHz, VCC = 3V  
(ATtiny26L)  
2.5  
8
6
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Active 8 MHz, VCC = 5V  
(ATtiny26)  
15  
Power Supply Current  
Idle 1 MHz, VCC = 3V  
(ATtiny26L)  
0.18  
0.75  
3.5  
ICC  
Idle 4 MHz, VCC = 3V  
(ATtiny26L)  
2
7
Idle 8 MHz, VCC = 5V  
(ATtiny26)  
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
7.5  
0.3  
15  
3
µA  
µA  
Power-down mode(6)  
VCC = 5V  
Analog Comparator  
Input Offset Voltage  
VACIO  
IACLK  
tACID  
<10  
40  
50  
mV  
nA  
ns  
Vin = VCC/2  
Analog Comparator  
Input Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V  
Vin = VCC/2  
-50  
Analog Comparator  
Propagation Delay  
VCC = 2.7V  
VCC = 4.0V  
750  
500  
Notes: 1. Typical values at 25°C.  
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
3. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
4. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at Vcc = 5V, 10 mA at Vcc = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 400 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOL, for port A0 - A7, should not exceed 300 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B7 should not exceed 300 mA.  
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater  
than the listed test condition.  
5. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20 mA at VCC = 5V, 10 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 400 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOH, for port A0 - A7, should not exceed 300 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B7 should not exceed 300 mA.  
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
6. Minimum VCC for Power-down is 2.5V.  
127  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
External Clock  
Figure 70. External Clock Drive Waveforms  
Drive Waveforms  
V
IH1  
V
IL1  
External Clock  
Drive  
Table 63. External Clock Drive  
VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V  
VCC = 4.5 - 5.5V  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Oscillator Frequency  
Clock Period  
High Time  
Min  
Max  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
0
8
16  
125  
50  
62.5  
25  
tCHCX  
tCLCX  
ns  
Low Time  
50  
25  
ns  
tCLCH  
Rise Time  
1.6  
1.6  
0.5  
0.5  
μs  
tCHCL  
Fall Time  
μs  
Change in period from one clock  
cycle to the next  
2
2
ΔtCLCL  
Table 64. External RC Oscillator, Typical Frequencies  
R [kΩ](1)  
C [pF]  
22  
f(2)  
33  
650 kHz  
2.0 MHz  
10  
22  
Notes: 1. R should be in the range 3 kΩ - 100 kΩ, and C should be at least 20 pF. The C values given in  
the table includes pin capacitance. This will vary with package type.  
2. The frequency will vary with package type and board layout.  
128  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
ADC Characteristics  
Table 65. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels, TA = -40°C to +85°C  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
Single Ended Conversion  
10  
Bits  
Single Ended Conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
1
2
LSB  
LSB  
Single Ended Conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 1 MHz  
Absolute Accuracy  
Single Ended Conversion  
(Including INL, DNL, Quantization Error, Gain  
and Offset Error)  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
1
2
LSB  
LSB  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Noise Reduction mode  
Single Ended Conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 1 MHz  
Noise Reduction mode  
Single Ended Conversion  
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)  
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)  
Gain Error  
V
REF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
0.5  
0.5  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Single Ended Conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Single Ended Conversion  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
0.75  
0.5  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Single Ended Conversion  
Offset error  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Clock Frequency  
50  
13  
1000  
260  
kHz  
µs  
Conversion Time  
AVCC  
VREF  
VIN  
Analog Supply Voltage  
Reference Voltage  
V
CC - 0.3(1)  
VCC + 0.3(2)  
AVCC  
VREF  
V
2.0  
V
Input Voltage  
GND  
0
V
ADC Conversion Output  
Input Bandwidth  
1023  
LSB  
kHz  
V
38.5  
2.7  
VINT  
RREF  
RAIN  
Internal Voltage Reference  
Reference Input Resistance  
Analog Input Resistance  
2.4  
2.9  
32  
kΩ  
MΩ  
100  
Note:  
1. Minimum for AVCC is 2.7V.  
2. Maximum for AVCC is 5.5V  
129  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Table 66. ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels, TA = -40°C to +85°C  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Gain = 1x  
Gain = 20x  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
10  
Units  
Bits  
Resolution  
10  
Bits  
Gain = 1x  
REF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
V
24  
27  
1.5  
2
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
Absolute Accuracy  
Gain = 20x  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
Gain = 1x  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)  
(Accuracy after Calibration for Offset and  
Gain Error)  
Gain = 20x  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
Gain = 1x  
2
%
%
Gain Error  
Gain = 20x  
2.5  
Gain = 1x  
V
REF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
4
6
LSB  
LSB  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
Offset Error  
Gain = 20x  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V  
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz  
Clock Frequency  
50  
200  
65  
kHz  
µs  
V
Conversion Time  
26  
AVCC  
VREF  
VIN  
Analog Supply Voltage  
Reference Voltage  
VCC - 0.3(1)  
VCC + 0.3(2)  
AVCC - 0.5  
VCC  
2.0  
GND  
0
V
Input Voltage  
V
VDIFF  
Input Differential Voltage  
ADC Conversion Output  
Input Bandwidth  
VREF/Gain  
1023  
V
0
LSB  
kHz  
V
4
VINT  
RREF  
RAIN  
Internal Voltage Reference  
Reference Input Resistance  
Analog Input Resistance  
2.4  
2.7  
32  
2.9  
kΩ  
MΩ  
100  
Notes: 1. Minimum for AVCC is 2.7V.  
2. Maximum for AVCC is 5.5V.  
130  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
ATtiny26  
Typical  
Characteristics  
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.  
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and  
with internal pull-ups enabled. A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock  
source.  
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.  
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating  
frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient tempera-  
ture. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.  
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where  
CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.  
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to  
function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.  
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer  
enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential cur-  
rent drawn by the Watchdog Timer.  
Active Supply Current Figure 71. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
0.1 - 1.0 MHz  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
4.0V  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
3.3V  
3.0V  
2.7V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
131  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 72. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
1 - 20 MHz  
25  
5.5V  
20  
15  
5.0V  
4.5V  
4.0V  
10  
3.3V  
5
3.0V  
2.7V  
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 73. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz  
14  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
12  
10  
8
6
4
2
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
132  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 74. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4 MHz  
8
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 75. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 2 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 2 MHz  
4
85°C  
25°C  
3.5  
3
-40°C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
133  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 76. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz  
1.8  
25°C  
85°C  
-40°C  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 77. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (PLL Oscillator)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
PLL OSCILLATOR  
25  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
134  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 78. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Oscillator)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
32kHz EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25°C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Idle Supply Current  
Figure 79. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
0.1 - 1.0 MHz  
0.6  
5.5V  
5.0V  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
4.5V  
4.0V  
3.3V  
3.0V  
2.7V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
135  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 80. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
1 - 20 MHz  
12  
5.5V  
5.0V  
10  
8
4.5V  
6
4.0V  
4
3.3V  
2
3.0V  
2.7V  
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 81. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz  
7
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
136  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 82. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4 MHz  
3.5  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
3
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 83. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 2 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 2 MHz  
1.6  
25°C  
1.4  
1.2  
1
85°C  
-40°C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
137  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 84. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz  
0.8  
25°C  
85°C  
-40°C  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 85. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (PLL Oscillator)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
PLL OSCILLATOR  
10  
8
25°C  
85°C  
-40°C  
6
4
2
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
138  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 86. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Oscillator)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
32kHz EXTERNAL OSCILLATOR  
30  
25°C  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Power-down Supply  
Current  
Figure 87. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
1.8  
85°C  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
-40°C  
25°C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
139  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 88. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER ENABLED  
20  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
6
4
2
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Standby Supply  
Current  
Figure 89. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (455 kHz Resonator, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
455 kHz RESONATOR, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
140  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 90. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (1 MHz Resonator, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
1 MHz RESONATOR, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 91. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (2 MHz Resonator, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
2 MHz RESONATOR, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
141  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 92. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (2 MHz XTAL, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
2 MHz XTAL, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 93. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (4 MHz Resonator, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
4 MHz RESONATOR, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
142  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 94. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (4 MHz XTAL, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
4 MHz XTAL, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 95. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (6 MHz Resonator, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
6 MHz RESONATOR, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
160  
140  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
143  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 96. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (6 MHz XTAL, Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
STANDBY SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
6 MHz XTAL, WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
180  
160  
140  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Pin Pull-up  
Figure 97. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
160  
85°C  
140  
25°C  
120  
-40°C  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
V
OP (V)  
144  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 98. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
80  
85°C  
25°C  
70  
-40°C  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
V
OP (V)  
Figure 99. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
120  
-40°C  
25°C  
100  
85°C  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
VRESET (V)  
145  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 100. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
60  
-40°C  
25°C  
50  
85°C  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
V
RESET (V)  
Pin Driver Strength  
Figure 101. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
90  
80  
-40°C  
70  
25°C  
60  
85°C  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
1
2
3
4
VOH (V)  
146  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 102. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
30  
-40°C  
25  
25°C  
85°C  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
V
OH (V)  
Figure 103. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
90  
-40°C  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25°C  
85°C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
147  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 104. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
35  
-40°C  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
25°C  
85°C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
Figure 105. Reset Pin as I/O – Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
1.4  
-40°C  
1.2  
25°C  
1
85°C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
0
1
2
3
VOH (V)  
148  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 106. Reset Pin as I/O – Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
2.5  
2
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
V
OH (V)  
Figure 107. Reset Pin as I/O –Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
14  
-40°C  
12  
25°C  
10  
85°C  
8
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
V
OL (V)  
149  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 108. Reset Pin as I/O – Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
4.5  
-40°C  
4
3.5  
25°C  
3
85°C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
V
OL (V)  
Pin Thresholds and  
Hysteresis  
Figure 109. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin Read as “1”)  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
2.5  
-40°C  
85°C  
25°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
150  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 110. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin Read as “0”)  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
2
1.5  
1
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 111. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
151  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 112. Reset Pin as I/O – Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC  
(VIH, Reset Pin Read as “1”)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, RESET PIN READ AS '1'  
2.5  
-40°C  
85°C  
25°C  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 113. Reset Pin as I/O – Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC  
(VIL, Reset Pin Read as “0”)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, RESET PIN READ AS '0'  
2.5  
2
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
152  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 114. Reset Pin as I/O – Pin Hysteresis vs. VCC  
RESET PIN AS I/O - PIN HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
85°C  
-40°C  
25°C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 115. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, Reset Pin Read as “1”)  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, RESET PIN READ AS '1'  
2.5  
2
1.5  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
153  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 116. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, Reset Pin Read as “0”)  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, RESET PIN READ AS '0'  
2.5  
2
1.5  
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
1
0.5  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 117. Reset Input Pin Hysteresis vs. VCC  
RESET INPUT PIN HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
0.5  
0.45  
0.4  
-40°C  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
25°C  
85°C  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
154  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
BOD Thresholds and  
Analog Comparator  
Offset  
Figure 118. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 4.0V)  
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE  
BODLEVEL IS 4.0V  
4.3  
4.2  
Rising VCC  
4.1  
4
Falling VCC  
3.9  
3.8  
-50  
-40  
-30  
-20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
Temperature (C)  
Figure 119. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 2.7V)  
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE  
BODLEVEL IS 2.7V  
3.1  
3
Rising VCC  
2.9  
2.8  
Falling VCC  
2.7  
2.6  
-50  
-40  
-30  
-20  
-10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
Temperature (C)  
155  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 120. Bandgap Voltage vs. VCC  
BANDGAP vs. VCC  
1.236  
1.234  
1.232  
1.23  
-40°C  
85°C  
25°C  
1.228  
1.226  
1.224  
1.222  
1.22  
1.218  
1.216  
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vcc (V)  
Figure 121. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs. Common Mode Voltage (VCC= 5.0V)  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs. COMMON MODE VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 5V  
0.009  
0.008  
0.007  
0.006  
0.005  
-40°C  
0.004  
25°C  
0.003  
85°C  
0.002  
0.001  
0
0
1
2
3
4
Common Mode Voltage (V)  
156  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 122. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs. Common Mode Voltage (VCC= 2.7V)  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs. COMMON MODE VOLTAGE  
Vcc = 2.7V  
0.009  
0.008  
0.007  
0.006  
0.005  
0.004  
0.003  
0.002  
0.001  
0
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
Common Mode Voltage (V)  
Internal Oscillator  
Speed  
Figure 123. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
1.4  
1.35  
1.3  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
1.25  
1.2  
1.15  
1.1  
1.05  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
157  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 124. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
8.9  
8.4  
7.9  
5.0V  
7.4  
6.9  
6.4  
3.5V  
2.7V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Ta (˚C)  
Figure 125. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
9
8.5  
8
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
7.5  
7
6.5  
6
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
158  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 126. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 8MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
17.5  
15.5  
13.5  
11.5  
9.5  
7.5  
5.5  
3.5  
0
16  
32  
48  
64  
80  
96  
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL VALUE  
Figure 127. Calibrated 4 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 4MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
4.3  
4.2  
4.1  
4
3.9  
5.0V  
3.5V  
2.7V  
3.8  
3.7  
3.6  
3.5  
3.4  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Ta (˚C)  
159  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 128. Calibrated 4 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 4MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
4.4  
4.3  
4.2  
4.1  
4
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
3.9  
3.8  
3.7  
3.6  
3.5  
3.4  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 129. Calibrated 4 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 4MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
9.6  
8.6  
7.6  
6.6  
5.6  
4.6  
3.6  
2.6  
1.6  
0
16  
32  
48  
64  
80  
96  
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL VALUE  
160  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 130. Calibrated 2 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 2MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
2.15  
2.1  
2.05  
2
1.95  
1.9  
5.0V  
3.5V  
2.7V  
1.85  
1.8  
1.75  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Ta (˚C)  
Figure 131. Calibrated 2 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 2MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
2.15  
2.1  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
2.05  
2
1.95  
1.9  
1.85  
1.8  
1.75  
1.7  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
161  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 132. Calibrated 2 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 2MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
4.3  
3.8  
3.3  
2.8  
2.3  
1.8  
1.3  
0.8  
0
16  
32  
48  
64  
80  
96  
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL VALUE  
Figure 133. Calibrated 1 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 1 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
1.04  
1.02  
1
0.98  
5.0V  
0.96  
0.94  
0.92  
0.9  
3.5V  
2.7V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
V
CC (V)  
162  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 134. Calibrated 1 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 1MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
1.1  
1.05  
1
°C  
-40  
25°C  
85°C  
0.95  
0.9  
0.85  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 135. Calibrated 1 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 1MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
2
1.8  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0
16  
32  
48  
64  
80  
96  
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL VALUE  
163  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Current Consumption Figure 136. Brown-out Detector Current vs. VCC  
of Peripheral Units  
BROWNOUT DETECTOR CURRENT vs. VCC  
0.035  
0.03  
0.025  
0.02  
0.015  
0.01  
0.005  
0
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 137. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC  
)
ADC CURRENT vs. VCC  
AREF = AVCC  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
164  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 138. AREF External Reference Current vs. VCC  
AREF EXTERNAL REFERENCE CURRENT vs. VCC  
250  
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
200  
150  
100  
50  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 139. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC  
ANALOG COMPARATOR CURRENT vs. VCC  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
165  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Figure 140. Programming Current vs. VCC  
PROGRAMMING CURRENT vs. VCC  
5
4
3
2
1
0
-40°C  
25°C  
85°C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Current Consumption Figure 141. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC  
in Reset and Reset  
Pulsewidth  
(0.1 - 1.0 MHz, Excluding Current Through The Reset Pull-up)  
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
0.1 - 1.0 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP  
3.5  
3
5.5V  
5.0V  
2.5  
2
4.5V  
4.0V  
3.3V  
3.0V  
2.7V  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
166  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Figure 142. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC  
(1 - 20 MHz, Excluding Current Through The Reset Pull-up)  
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
1 - 20 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP  
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
4.0V  
3.3V  
3.0V  
2.7V  
6
4
2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 143. Reset Pulsewidth vs. VCC  
RESET PULSE WIDTH vs. VCC  
1200  
1000  
800  
600  
400  
200  
0
85°C  
25°C  
-40°C  
0
1
2
3
VCC (V)  
167  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Register Summary  
Address  
Name  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
$3F ($5F)  
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
$3C ($5C)  
$3B ($5B)  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$37 ($57)  
$36 ($56)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
$27 ($47)  
$26 ($46)  
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
$23 ($43)  
$22 ($42)  
$21 ($41)  
$20 ($40)  
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B ($3B)  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$15 ($35)  
$14 ($34)  
$13 ($33)  
$12 ($32)  
$11 ($31)  
$10 ($30)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$0C ($2C)  
$0B ($2)B  
$0A ($2A)  
$09 ($29)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
$06 ($26)  
$05 ($25)  
$04 ($24)  
SREG  
Reserved  
SP  
I
T
H
S
V
N
Z
C
10  
SP7  
SP6  
SP5  
SP4  
SP3  
SP2  
SP1  
SP0  
11  
Reserved  
GIMSK  
-
-
-
-
INT0  
INTF0  
PCIE1  
PCIF  
PCIE0  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
58  
59  
59  
60  
GIFR  
-
-
-
-
-
TIMSK  
OCIE1A  
OCF1A  
OCIE1B  
OCF1B  
TOIE1  
TOV1  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
TIFR  
Reserved  
Reserved  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
-
-
-
PUD  
SE  
SM1  
SM0  
WDRF  
PSR0  
-
ISC01  
EXTRF  
CS01  
ISC00  
PORF  
CS00  
37  
36  
66  
67  
29  
70  
71  
72  
72  
73  
73  
-
-
-
-
-
-
BORF  
CS02  
Timer/Counter0 (8-Bit)  
OSCCAL  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
TCNT1  
Oscillator Calibration Register  
COM1A1  
CTC1  
COM1A0  
PSR1  
COM1B1  
-
COM1B0  
-
FOC1A  
CS13  
FOC1B  
CS12  
PWM1A  
CS11  
PWM1B  
CS10  
Timer/Counter1 (8-Bit)  
OCR1A  
OCR1B  
OCR1C  
Reserved  
PLLCSR  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
WDTCR  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EEAR  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A (8-Bit)  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B (8-Bit)  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C (8-Bit)  
-
-
-
-
-
PCKE  
PLLE  
PLOCK  
-
-
-
-
WDCE  
EEAR4  
WDE  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
78  
EEAR6  
EEAR5  
EEAR3  
EEAR2  
EEAR1  
EEAR0  
18  
19  
19  
EEDR  
EEPROM Data Register (8-Bit)  
EECR  
-
-
-
-
EERIE  
PORTA3  
DDA3  
EEMWE  
PORTA2  
DDA2  
EEWE  
PORTA1  
DDA1  
EERE  
PORTA0  
DDA0  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PORTA7  
DDA7  
PORTA6  
DDA6  
PORTA5  
DDA5  
PORTA4  
DDA4  
PINA  
PINA7  
PORTB7  
DDB7  
PINA6  
PORTB6  
DDB6  
PINA5  
PORTB5  
DDB5  
PINA4  
PORTB4  
DDB4  
PINA3  
PINA2  
PINA1  
PINA0  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PORTB3  
DDB3  
PORTB2  
DDB2  
PORTB1  
DDB1  
PORTB0  
DDB0  
PINB  
PINB7  
PINB6  
PINB5  
PINB4  
PINB3  
PINB2  
PINB1  
PINB0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
USIDR  
Universal Serial Interface Data Register (8-Bit)  
81  
81  
82  
USISR  
USISIF  
USISIE  
USIOIF  
USIOIE  
USIPF  
USIDC  
USICNT3  
USICS1  
USICNT2  
USICS0  
USICNT1  
USICLK  
USICNT0  
USITC  
USICR  
USIWM1  
USIWM0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ACSR  
ACD  
REFS1  
ADEN  
ACBG  
REFS0  
ADSC  
ACO  
ADLAR  
ADFR  
ACI  
MUX4  
ADIF  
ACIE  
MUX3  
ADIE  
ACME  
MUX2  
ADPS2  
ACIS1  
MUX1  
ACIS0  
MUX0  
91  
ADMUX  
ADCSR  
ADCH  
101  
103  
104  
104  
ADPS1  
ADPS0  
ADC Data Register High Byte  
ADC Data Register Low Byte  
ADCL  
Reserved  
Reserved  
$00 ($20)  
168  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonic  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
# Clocks  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS  
ADD  
ADC  
ADIW  
SUB  
SUBI  
SBC  
SBCI  
SBIW  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add Two Registers  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K  
Rd Rd - Rr  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,N,V  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Add with Carry Two Registers  
Add Immediate to Word  
Subtract Two Registers  
Subtract Constant from Register  
Subtract with Carry Two Registers  
Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg.  
Subtract Immediate from Word  
Logical AND Registers  
Logical AND Register and Constant  
Logical OR Registers  
Rd Rd - K  
Rd Rd - Rr - C  
Rd Rd - K - C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd Rd K  
Z,N,V  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
ORI  
Logical OR Register and Constant  
Exclusive OR Registers  
One’s Complement  
Z,N,V  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
CBR  
INC  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd $FF - Rd  
Rd $00 - Rd  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Two’s Complement  
Rd, K  
Rd, K  
Rd  
Set Bit(s) in Register  
Clear Bit(s) in Register  
Increment  
Rd Rd ($FF - K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
DEC  
TST  
Rd  
Decrement  
Rd Rd - 1  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Test for Zero or Minus  
Clear Register  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd $FF  
Z,N,V  
CLR  
SER  
Rd  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Set Register  
None  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
RJMP  
IJMP  
k
k
Relative Jump  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
I
2
2
Indirect Jump to (Z)  
PC Z  
RCALL  
ICALL  
RET  
Relative Subroutine Call  
Indirect Call to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
3
PC Z  
3
Subroutine Return  
PC STACK  
4
RETI  
Interrupt Return  
PC STACK  
4
CPSE  
CP  
Rd, Rr  
Compare, Skip if Equal  
Compare  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd - Rr  
None  
Z,N,V,C,H  
Z,N,V,C,H  
Z,N,V,C,H  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2/3  
1
Rd, Rr  
CPC  
Rd, Rr  
Compare with Carry  
Rd - Rr - C  
1
CPI  
Rd, K  
Compare Register with Immediate  
Skip if Bit in Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in Register is Set  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set  
Branch if Status Flag Set  
Branch if Status Flag Cleared  
Branch if Equal  
Rd - K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
Rr, b  
if (Rr(b) = 0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b) = 1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b) = 0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b) = 1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Rr, b  
P, b  
P, b  
s, k  
s, k  
k
SBIS  
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
BRTS  
BRTC  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
BRID  
k
Branch if Not Equal  
k
Branch if Carry Set  
k
Branch if Carry Cleared  
Branch if Same or Higher  
Branch if Lower  
k
k
k
Branch if Minus  
k
Branch if Plus  
k
Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed  
Branch if Less than Zero, Signed  
Branch if Half-carry Flag Set  
Branch if Half-carry Flag Cleared  
Branch if T-flag Set  
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if T-flag Cleared  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Set  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared  
Branch if Interrupt Enabled  
Branch if Interrupt Disabled  
k
k
k
k
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS  
MOV  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Move between Registers  
Load Immediate  
Rd Rr  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
2
2
2
Rd K  
Rd, X  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X)  
LD  
Rd, X+  
Rd, -X  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X - 1, Rd (X)  
LD  
169  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonic  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
# Clocks  
LD  
Rd, Y  
Load Indirect  
Rd (Y)  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
LD  
Rd, Y+  
Rd, -Y  
Rd,Y+q  
Rd, Z  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Indirect  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y + q)  
Rd (Z)  
LD  
LDD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Z+  
Rd, -Z  
Rd, Z+q  
Rd, k  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Direct from SRAM  
Store Indirect  
Rd (Z), Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z + q)  
Rd (k)  
LD  
LDD  
LDS  
ST  
X, Rr  
(X) Rr  
ST  
X+, Rr  
-X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X - 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Y+, Rr  
-Y, Rr  
Y+q, Rr  
Z, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Indirect  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr  
(Y + q) Rr  
(Z) Rr  
ST  
STD  
ST  
ST  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
Z+q, Rr  
k, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Direct to SRAM  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory  
In Port  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr  
(Z + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
STS  
LPM  
LPM  
IN  
(k) Rr  
R0 (Z)  
Rd, Z  
Rd, P  
P, Rr  
Rr  
Rd (Z)  
Rd P  
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
Out Port  
P Rr  
Push Register on Stack  
Pop Register from Stack  
STACK Rr  
Rd STACK  
Rd  
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS  
SBI  
P, b  
P, b  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
s
Set Bit in I/O Register  
Clear Bit in I/O Register  
Logical Shift Left  
I/O(P,b) 1  
None  
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CBI  
I/O(P,b) 0  
None  
LSL  
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0  
Z,C,N,V  
LSR  
ROL  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Logical Shift Right  
Rotate Left through Carry  
Rotate Right through Carry  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Swap Nibbles  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(0) C, Rd(n+1) Rd(n), C Rd(7)  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(7) C, Rd(n) Rd(n+1), C Rd(0)  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n = 0..6  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd(3..0) Rd(7..4), Rd(7..4) Rd(3..0)  
None  
Flag Set  
SREG(s) 1  
SREG(s) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
SREG(s)  
s
Flag Clear  
SREG(s)  
Rr, b  
Rd, b  
Bit Store from Register to T  
Bit Load from T to Register  
Set Carry  
T
None  
C
Clear Carry  
C 0  
C
Set Negative Flag  
N 1  
N
Clear Negative Flag  
Set Zero Flag  
N 0  
N
Z 1  
Z
Clear Zero Flag  
Z 0  
Z
Global Interrupt Enable  
Global Interrupt Disable  
Set Signed Test Flag  
Clear Signed Test Flag  
Set Two’s Complement Overflow  
Clear Two’s Complement Overflow  
Set T in SREG  
I 1  
I
CLI  
I 0  
I
SES  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
SET  
CLT  
SEH  
CLH  
NOP  
SLEEP  
WDR  
S 1  
S
S 0  
S
V 1  
V
V 0  
V
T 1  
T
Clear T in SREG  
T 0  
T
Set Half-carry Flag in SREG  
Clear Half-carry Flag in SREG  
No Operation  
H 1  
H
H 0  
H
None  
None  
None  
Sleep  
(see specific descr. for Sleep function)  
(see specific descr. for WDR/timer)  
Watchdog Reset  
170  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Ordering Information  
Speed (MHz)  
Power Supply (V)  
Ordering Code(2)  
Package(2)  
Operational Range  
ATtiny26L-8PU  
ATtiny26L-8SU  
ATtiny26L-8SUR  
ATtiny26L-8MU  
ATtiny26L-8MUR  
20P3  
20S  
Industrial  
(-40°C to +85°C)(1)  
8
2.7 - 5.5  
4.5 - 5.5  
20S  
32M1-A  
32M1-A  
ATtiny26-16PU  
ATtiny26-16SU  
ATtiny26-16SUR  
ATtiny26-16MU  
ATtiny26-16MUR  
20P3  
20S  
Industrial  
(-40°C to +85°C)(1)  
16  
20S  
32M1-A  
32M1-A  
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information  
and minimum quantities.  
2. Pb-free packaging alternative, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS direc-  
tive). Also Halide free and fully Green.  
3. Code Indicators:  
– U: matte tin  
– R: tape & reel  
Package Type  
20P3  
20S  
20-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)  
20-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Gull Wing Small Outline (SOIC)  
32M1-A  
32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0 body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)  
171  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Packaging Information  
20P3  
D
PIN  
1
E1  
A
SEATING PLANE  
A1  
L
B
B1  
e
E
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
C
MIN  
MAX  
5.334  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
eC  
A
eB  
A1  
D
0.381  
25.493  
7.620  
6.096  
0.356  
1.270  
2.921  
0.203  
25.984 Note 2  
8.255  
E
E1  
B
7.112 Note 2  
0.559  
B1  
L
1.551  
Notes:  
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-001, Variation AD.  
2. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold Flash or Protrusion.  
Mold Flash or Protrusion shall not exceed 0.25 mm (0.010").  
3.810  
C
0.356  
eB  
eC  
e
10.922  
0.000  
1.524  
2.540 TYP  
1/12/04  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
TITLE  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
20P3, 20-lead (0.300"/7.62 mm Wide) Plastic Dual  
Inline Package (PDIP)  
20P3  
C
R
172  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
20S  
173  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
32M1-A  
D
D1  
1
2
3
0
Pin 1 ID  
SIDE VIEW  
E1  
E
TOP VIEW  
A3  
A1  
A2  
A
K
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
0.08  
C
P
D2  
MIN  
0.80  
MAX  
1.00  
0.05  
1.00  
NOM  
0.90  
0.02  
0.65  
0.20 REF  
0.23  
5.00  
4.75  
3.10  
5.00  
4.75  
3.10  
0.50 BSC  
0.40  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
A1  
A2  
A3  
b
1
2
3
P
Pin #1 Notch  
(0.20 R)  
E2  
0.18  
4.90  
4.70  
2.95  
4.90  
4.70  
2.95  
0.30  
5.10  
4.80  
3.25  
5.10  
4.80  
3.25  
D
K
D1  
D2  
E
e
b
L
E1  
E2  
e
BOTTOM VIEW  
L
0.30  
0.50  
0.60  
P
o
12  
0
Note: JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 2 (Anvil Singulation), VHHD-2.  
K
0.20  
5/25/06  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
TITLE  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
32M1-A, 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm,  
3.10 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)  
32M1-A  
E
R
174  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Errata  
The revision letter refers to the revision of the device.  
ATtiny26 Rev.  
B/C/D  
First Analog Comparator conversion may be delayed  
1. First Analog Comparator conversion may be delayed  
If the device is powered by a slow rising VCC, the first Analog Comparator conversion will  
take longer than expected on some devices.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
When the device has been powered or reset, disable then enable the Analog Comparator  
before the first conversion.  
175  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Datasheet  
Revision  
History  
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section refer to the complete document.  
Rev. 1477K-08/10  
Added tape and reel part numbers in “Ordering Information” on page 171. Removed text  
“Not recommended for new design” from cover page. Updated last page.  
Rev. 1477J-06/07  
Rev. 1477I-05/06  
Rev. 1477H-04/06  
1. “Not recommended for new design”  
1. Updated “Errata” on page 175  
1. Updated typos.  
2. Added “Resources” on page 6.  
3. Updated features in “System Control and Reset” on page 32.  
4. Updated “Prescaling and Conversion Timing” on page 96.  
5. Updated algorithm for “Enter Programming Mode” on page 112.  
Rev. 1477G-03/05  
Rev. 1477F-12/04  
1. MLF-package alternative changed to “Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package  
QFN/MLF”.  
2. Updated “Electrical Characteristics” on page 126  
3. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 171  
1. Updated Table 16 on page 33, Table 9 on page 28, and Table 29 on page 57.  
2. Added Table 20 on page 40.  
3. Added “Changing Channel or Reference Selection” on page 98.  
4. Updated “Offset Compensation Schemes” on page 105.  
5. Updated “Electrical Characteristics” on page 126.  
6. Updated package information for “20P3” on page 172.  
7. Rearranged some sections in the datasheet.  
Rev. 1477E-10/03  
1. Removed Preliminary references.  
2. Updated “Features” on page 1.  
3. Removed SSOP package reference from “Pin Configuration” on page 2.  
4. Updated VRST and tRST in Table 16 on page 33.  
5. Updated “Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator” on page 29.  
176  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
6. Updated DC Characteristics for VOL, IIL, IIH, ICC Power Down and VACIO in “Electrical  
Characteristics” on page 126.  
7. Updated VINT, INL and Gain Error in “ADC Characteristics” on page 129 and page 130.  
Fixed typo in “Absolute Accuracy” on page 130.  
8. Added Figure 106 in “Pin Driver Strength” on page 146, Figure 120, Figure 121 and  
Figure 122 in “BOD Thresholds and Analog Comparator Offset” on page 155. Updated  
Figure 117 and Figure 118.  
9. Removed LPM Rd, Z+ from “Instruction Set Summary” on page 169. This instruction  
is not supported in ATtiny26.  
Rev. 1477D-05/03  
1. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 172.  
2. Removed ADHSM from “ADC Characteristics” on page 129.  
3. Added section “EEPROM Write During Power-down Sleep Mode” on page 20.  
4. Added section “Default Clock Source” on page 26.  
5. Corrected PLL Lock value in the “Bit 0 – PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector” on page 73.  
6. Added information about conversion time when selecting differential channels on  
page 97.  
7. Corrected {DDxn, PORTxn} value on page 42.  
8. Added section “Unconnected Pins” on page 46.  
9. Added note for RSTDISBL Fuse in Table 50 on page 108.  
10. Corrected DATA value in Figure 61 on page 116.  
11. Added WD_FUSE period in Table 60 on page 123.  
12. Updated “ADC Characteristics” on page 129 and added Table 66, “ADC Characteris-  
tics, Differential Channels, TA = -40°C to +85°C,” on page 130.  
13. Updated “ATtiny26 Typical Characteristics” on page 131.  
14. Added LPM Rd, Z and LPM Rd, Z+ in “Instruction Set Summary” on page 169.  
Rev. 1477C-09/02  
Rev. 1477B-04/02  
1. Changed the Endurance on the Flash to 10,000 Write/Erase Cycles.  
1. Removed all references to Power Save sleep mode in the section “System Clock and  
Clock Options” on page 23.  
2. Updated the section “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 94 with more details on  
how to read the conversion result for both differential and single-ended conversion.  
3. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 171 and added QFN/MLF package  
information.  
Rev. 1477A-03/02  
1. Initial version.  
177  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
178  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Table of  
Features................................................................................................ 1  
Contents  
Pin Configuration ................................................................................ 2  
Description........................................................................................... 3  
Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 4  
Pin Descriptions.................................................................................................... 5  
General Information ............................................................................ 6  
Resources ............................................................................................................ 6  
Code Examples .................................................................................................... 6  
AVR CPU Core ..................................................................................... 7  
Architectural Overview.......................................................................................... 7  
General Purpose Register File ............................................................................. 8  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit.................................................................................. 9  
Status Register – SREG..................................................................................... 10  
Stack Pointer – SP ............................................................................................. 11  
Program and Data Addressing Modes ............................................................... 11  
Memories............................................................................................ 16  
In-System Programmable Flash Program Memory ............................................ 17  
SRAM Data Memory........................................................................................... 17  
EEPROM Data Memory ..................................................................................... 18  
I/O Memory......................................................................................................... 20  
System Clock and Clock Options .................................................... 23  
Clock Systems and their Distribution.................................................................. 23  
Clock Sources .................................................................................................... 25  
Default Clock Source.......................................................................................... 26  
Crystal Oscillator ................................................................................................ 26  
Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator........................................................................ 27  
External RC Oscillator ........................................................................................ 28  
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator........................................................................ 29  
External Clock .................................................................................................... 30  
High Frequency PLL Clock – PLLCLK ............................................................... 31  
System Control and Reset................................................................ 32  
Power-on Reset.................................................................................................. 33  
External Reset.................................................................................................... 34  
Brown-out Detection ........................................................................................... 35  
Watchdog Reset................................................................................................. 35  
MCU Status Register – MCUSR......................................................................... 36  
Power Management and Sleep Modes ............................................ 37  
MCU Control Register – MCUCR ....................................................................... 37  
i
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Idle Mode............................................................................................................ 38  
ADC Noise Reduction Mode............................................................................... 38  
Power-down Mode.............................................................................................. 38  
Standby Mode .................................................................................................... 39  
Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................... 40  
I/O Ports.............................................................................................. 41  
Introduction......................................................................................................... 41  
Ports as General Digital I/O................................................................................ 41  
Alternate Port Functions..................................................................................... 46  
Register Description for I/O Ports....................................................................... 56  
Interrupts............................................................................................ 57  
Interrupt Vectors................................................................................................. 57  
Interrupt Handling............................................................................................... 58  
External Interrupt............................................................................... 62  
Pin Change Interrupt .......................................................................................... 62  
Timer/Counters.................................................................................. 64  
Timer/Counter0 Prescaler .................................................................................. 64  
Timer/Counter1 Prescaler .................................................................................. 65  
8-bit Timer/Counter0........................................................................................... 65  
8-bit Timer/Counter1........................................................................................... 67  
Watchdog Timer ................................................................................ 78  
Universal Serial Interface – USI........................................................ 80  
Overview............................................................................................................. 80  
Register Descriptions ......................................................................................... 81  
Functional Descriptions ...................................................................................... 85  
Alternative USI Usage ........................................................................................ 90  
Analog Comparator........................................................................... 91  
Analog to Digital Converter.............................................................. 94  
Features ............................................................................................................. 94  
Operation............................................................................................................ 95  
Prescaling and Conversion Timing..................................................................... 96  
Changing Channel or Reference Selection ........................................................ 98  
ADC Noise Canceler Function............................................................................ 99  
ADC Conversion Result...................................................................................... 99  
Scanning Multiple Channels............................................................................. 105  
ADC Noise Canceling Techniques ................................................................... 105  
Offset Compensation Schemes........................................................................ 105  
ii  
ATtiny26(L)  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny26(L)  
Memory Programming .................................................................... 107  
Program and Data Memory Lock Bits............................................................... 107  
Fuse Bits........................................................................................................... 108  
Signature Bytes ................................................................................................ 109  
Calibration Byte ................................................................................................ 109  
Page Size ......................................................................................................... 109  
Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands .................. 109  
Parallel Programming....................................................................................... 112  
Serial Downloading........................................................................................... 121  
Serial Programming Pin Mapping..................................................................... 121  
Electrical Characteristics................................................................ 126  
Absolute Maximum Ratings* ............................................................................ 126  
DC Characteristics............................................................................................ 126  
External Clock Drive Waveforms...................................................................... 128  
External Clock Drive ......................................................................................... 128  
ADC Characteristics ......................................................................................... 129  
ATtiny26 Typical Characteristics................................................... 131  
Register Summary........................................................................... 168  
Instruction Set Summary................................................................ 169  
Ordering Information....................................................................... 171  
Packaging Information.................................................................... 172  
20P3 ................................................................................................................. 172  
20S ................................................................................................................... 173  
32M1-A............................................................................................................. 174  
Errata ................................................................................................ 175  
ATtiny26 Rev. B/C/D ........................................................................................ 175  
Datasheet Revision History............................................................ 176  
Rev. 1477K-08/10............................................................................................. 176  
Rev. 1477J-06/07 ............................................................................................. 176  
Rev. 1477I-05/06.............................................................................................. 176  
Rev. 1477H-04/06 ............................................................................................ 176  
Rev. 1477G-03/05 ............................................................................................ 176  
Rev. 1477F-12/04............................................................................................. 176  
Rev. 1477E-10/03............................................................................................. 176  
Rev. 1477D-05/03 ............................................................................................ 177  
Rev. 1477C-09/02 ............................................................................................ 177  
Rev. 1477B-04/02............................................................................................. 177  
Rev. 1477A-03/02............................................................................................. 177  
iii  
1477K–AVR–08/10  
Headquarters  
International  
Atmel Corporation  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
USA  
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311  
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600  
Atmel Asia  
Atmel Europe  
Le Krebs  
Atmel Japan  
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.  
1-24-8 Shinkawa  
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033  
Japan  
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551  
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581  
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F  
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5  
418 Kwun Tong Road  
Kwun Tong, Kowloon  
Hong Kong  
8, Rue Jean-Pierre Timbaud  
BP 309  
78054 Saint-Quentin-en-  
Yvelines Cedex  
France  
Tel: (852) 2245-6100  
Fax: (852) 2722-1369  
Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00  
Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11  
Product Contact  
Web Site  
Technical Support  
Sales Contact  
www.atmel.com  
Enter Product Line E-mail  
www.atmel.com/contacts  
Literature Requests  
www.atmel.com/literature  
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any  
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY  
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDEN-  
TAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT  
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no  
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications  
and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided  
otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use  
as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.  
© 2010 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. Atmel®, logo and combinations thereof, AVR® and others are registered trademarks or trade-  
marks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.  
1477K–AVR–08/10  

相关型号:

ATTINY26L-8SUR

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, AVR RISC CPU, 8MHz, CMOS, PDSO20, 0.300 INCH, GREEN, PLASTIC, MS-013AC, SOIC-20
ATMEL

ATTINY26_06

8-bit Microcontroller with 2K Bytes Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY26_07

8-bit Microcontroller with 2K Bytes Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AC

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AI

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AJ

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 4MHz, CMOS, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, 1 MM THICKNESS, 0.80 MM PITCH, PLASTIC, MS-026ABA, TQFP-32
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AL

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 4MHz, CMOS, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, 1 MM THICKNESS, 0.80 MM PITCH, PLASTIC, MS-026ABA, TQFP-32
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AU

8-bit Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4AUR

IC MCU 8BIT 2KB FLASH 32TQFP
MICROCHIP

ATTINY28L-4MC

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY28L-4MI

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2K Bytes of Flash
ATMEL